2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
..
Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
2020-09-14 21:04:19 +00:00
file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
information regarding copyright ownership.
.. Reference:
BIND 9 Configuration Reference
==============================
.. _configuration_file_elements:
Configuration File Elements
---------------------------
Following is a list of elements used throughout the BIND configuration
file documentation:
.. glossary ::
`` acl_name ``
The name of an `` address_match_list `` as defined by the `` acl `` statement.
`` address_match_list ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A list of one or more `` ip_addr `` , `` ip_prefix `` , `` key_id `` , or `` acl_name `` elements; see :ref: `address_match_lists` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries_list ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A named list of one or more `` ip_addr `` with optional `` key_id `` and/or `` ip_port `` . A `` primaries_list `` may include other `` primaries_list `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` domain_name ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A quoted string which is used as a DNS name; for example. `` my.test.domain `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` namelist ``
A list of one or more `` domain_name `` elements.
`` dotted_decimal ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
One to four integers valued 0 through 255 separated by dots (`` . `` ), such as `` 123.45.67 `` or `` 89.123.45.67 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ip4_addr ``
An IPv4 address with exactly four elements in `` dotted_decimal `` notation.
`` ip6_addr ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
An IPv6 address, such as `` 2001:db8::1234 `` . IPv6-scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their scope zones must be disambiguated by an appropriate zone ID with the percent character (`` % `` ) as a delimiter. It is strongly recommended to use string zone names rather than numeric identifiers, to be robust against system configuration changes. However, since there is no standard mapping for such names and identifier values, only interface names as link identifiers are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between interfaces and links. For example, a link-local address `` fe80::1 `` on the link attached to the interface `` ne0 `` can be specified as `` fe80::1%ne0 `` . Note that on most systems link-local addresses always have ambiguity and need to be disambiguated.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ip_addr ``
An `` ip4_addr `` or `` ip6_addr `` .
`` ip_dscp ``
A `` number `` between 0 and 63, used to select a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value for use with outgoing traffic on operating systems that support DSCP.
`` ip_port ``
An IP port `` number `` . The `` number `` is limited to 0 through 65535, with values below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running as root. In some cases, an asterisk (`` * `` ) character can be used as a placeholder to select a random high-numbered port.
`` ip_prefix ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
An IP network specified as an `` ip_addr `` , followed by a slash (`` / `` ) and then the number of bits in the netmask. Trailing zeros in an`` ip_addr `` may be omitted. For example, `` 127/8 `` is the network `` 127.0.0.0 ` ` with netmask ` ` 255.0.0.0 `` and `` 1.2.3.0/28 `` is network `` 1.2.3.0 `` with netmask `` 255.255.255.240 `` .
When specifying a prefix involving a IPv6-scoped address, the scope may be omitted. In that case, the prefix matches packets from any scope.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` key_id ``
A `` domain_name `` representing the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction security.
`` key_list ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A list of one or more `` key_id `` , separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` number ``
A non-negative 32-bit integer (i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive). Its acceptable value might be further limited by the context in which it is used.
`` fixedpoint ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
A non-negative real number that can be specified to the nearest one-hundredth. Up to five digits can be specified before a decimal point, and up to two digits after, so the maximum value is 99999.99. Acceptable values might be further limited by the contexts in which they are used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` path_name ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A quoted string which is used as a pathname, such as `` zones/master/my.test.domain `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` port_list ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A list of an `` ip_port `` or a port range. A port range is specified in the form of `` range `` followed by two `` ip_port ` ` s, ` ` port_low `` and `` port_high `` , which represents port numbers from `` port_low `` through `` port_high `` , inclusive. `` port_low `` must not be larger than `` port_high `` . For example, `` range 1024 65535 `` represents ports from 1024 through 65535. In either case an asterisk (`` * `` ) character is not allowed as a valid `` ip_port `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` size_spec ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A 64-bit unsigned integer, or the keywords `` unlimited `` or `` default `` . Integers may take values 0 <= value <= 18446744073709551615, though certain parameters (such as `` max-journal-size `` ) may use a more limited range within these extremes. In most cases, setting a value to 0 does not literally mean zero; it means "undefined" or "as big as possible," depending on the context. See the explanations of particular parameters that use `` size_spec `` for details on how they interpret its use. Numeric values can optionally be followed by a scaling factor: `` K `` or `` k `` for kilobytes, `` M `` or `` m `` for megabytes, and `` G `` or `` g `` for gigabytes, which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024* 1024*1024 respectively.
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
`` unlimited `` generally means "as big as possible," and is usually the best way to safely set a very large number.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` default `` uses the limit that was in force when the server was started.
`` size_or_percent ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A `` size_spec `` or integer value followed by `` % `` to represent percent. The behavior is exactly the same as `` size_spec `` , but `` size_or_percent `` also allows specifying a positive integer value followed by the `` % `` sign to represent percent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` yes_or_no ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Either `` yes `` or `` no `` . The words `` true `` and `` false `` are also accepted, as are the numbers `` 1 `` and `` 0 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` dialup_option ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
One of `` yes `` , `` no `` , `` notify `` , `` notify-passive `` , `` refresh `` , or `` passive `` . When used in a zone, `` notify-passive `` , `` refresh `` , and `` passive `` are restricted to secondary and stub zones.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _address_match_lists:
Address Match Lists
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Syntax
^^^^^^
::
address_match_list = address_match_list_element ; ...
address_match_list_element = [ ! ] ( ip_address | ip_prefix |
key key_id | acl_name | { address_match_list } )
Definition and Usage
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Address match lists are primarily used to determine access control for
various server operations. They are also used in the `` listen-on `` and
`` sortlist `` statements. The elements which constitute an address match
list can be any of the following:
- an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
- an IP prefix (in `` / `` notation)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
- a key ID, as defined by the `` key `` statement
- the name of an address match list defined with the `` acl `` statement
- a nested address match list enclosed in braces
Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`` ! `` ), and the
match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and "localnets" are
predefined. More information on those names can be found in the
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
description of the `` acl `` statement.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic element
something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used to validate
access without regard to a host or network address. Nonetheless, the
term "address match list" is still used throughout the documentation.
When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address match list,
the comparison takes place in approximately O(1) time. However, key
comparisons require that the list of keys be traversed until a matching
key is found, and therefore may be somewhat slower.
The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being used
for access control, defining `` listen-on `` ports, or in a `` sortlist `` ,
and whether the element was negated.
When used as an access control list, a non-negated match allows access
and a negated match denies access. If there is no match, access is
denied. The clauses `` allow-notify `` , `` allow-recursion `` ,
`` allow-recursion-on `` , `` allow-query `` , `` allow-query-on `` ,
`` allow-query-cache `` , `` allow-query-cache-on `` , `` allow-transfer `` ,
`` allow-update `` , `` allow-update-forwarding `` , `` blackhole `` , and
`` keep-response-order `` all use address match lists. Similarly, the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` listen-on `` option causes the server to refuse queries on any of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the machine's addresses which do not match the list.
Order of insertion is significant. If more than one element in an ACL is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
found to match a given IP address or prefix, preference is given to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the one that came *first* in the ACL definition. Because of this
first-match behavior, an element that defines a subset of another
element in the list should come before the broader element, regardless
of whether either is negated. For example, in `` 1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13; ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the 1.2.3.13 element is completely useless because the algorithm
matches any lookup for 1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24 element. Using
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` ! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24 `` fixes that problem by blocking 1.2.3.13
via the negation, but all other 1.2.3.\* hosts pass through.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _comment_syntax:
Comment Syntax
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The BIND 9 comment syntax allows comments to appear anywhere that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
whitespace may appear in a BIND configuration file. To appeal to
programmers of all kinds, they can be written in the C, C++, or
shell/perl style.
Syntax
^^^^^^
::
/* This is a BIND comment as in C * /
::
// This is a BIND comment as in C++
::
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
# This is a BIND comment as in common Unix shells
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
# and perl
Definition and Usage
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in a BIND
configuration file.
C-style comments start with the two characters /\* (slash, star) and end
with \*/ (star, slash). Because they are completely delimited with these
characters, they can be used to comment only a portion of a line or to
span multiple lines.
C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following is not
valid because the entire comment ends with the first \*/:
::
/* This is the start of a comment.
This is still part of the comment.
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. * /
This is no longer in any comment. */
C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash, slash) and
continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot be continued
across multiple physical lines; to have one logical comment span
multiple lines, each line must use the // pair. For example:
::
// This is the start of a comment. The next line
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
// part of the previous comment.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Shell-style (or perl-style) comments start with the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
character `` # `` (number sign) and continue to the end of the physical
line, as in C++ comments. For example:
::
# This is the start of a comment. The next line
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
# part of the previous comment.
..
.. warning ::
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
The semicolon (`` ; `` ) character cannot start a comment, unlike
in a zone file. The semicolon indicates the end of a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configuration statement.
.. _Configuration_File_Grammar:
Configuration File Grammar
--------------------------
A BIND 9 configuration consists of statements and comments. Statements
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
end with a semicolon; statements and comments are the only elements that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
can appear without enclosing braces. Many statements contain a block of
sub-statements, which are also terminated with a semicolon.
The following statements are supported:
`` acl ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Defines a named IP address matching list, for access control and other uses.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` controls ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Declares control channels to be used by the `` rndc `` utility.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` dnssec-policy ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Describes a DNSSEC key and signing policy for zones. See :ref: `dnssec-policy Grammar <dnssec_policy_grammar>` for details.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` include ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Includes a file.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` key ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Specifies key information for use in authentication and authorization using TSIG.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` logging ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Specifies what information the server logs and where the log messages are sent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` masters ``
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
Synonym for `` primaries `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` options ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Controls global server configuration options and sets defaults for other statements.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries ``
Defines a named list of servers for inclusion in stub and secondary zones' `` primaries `` or `` also-notify `` lists. (Note: this is a synonym for the original keyword `` masters `` , which can still be used, but is no longer the preferred terminology.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` server ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Sets certain configuration options on a per-server basis.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` statistics-channels ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Declares communication channels to get access to `` named `` statistics.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` trust-anchors ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Defines DNSSEC trust anchors: if used with the `` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds `` keyword, trust anchors are kept up-to-date using :rfc: `5011` trust anchor maintenance; if used with `` static-key `` or `` static-ds `` , keys are permanent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` managed-keys ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Is identical to `` trust-anchors `` ; this option is deprecated in favor of `` trust-anchors `` with the `` initial-key `` keyword, and may be removed in a future release.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` trusted-keys ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Defines permanent trusted DNSSEC keys; this option is deprecated in favor of `` trust-anchors `` with the `` static-key `` keyword, and may be removed in a future release.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` view ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Defines a view.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` zone ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Defines a zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` logging `` and `` options `` statements may only occur once per
configuration.
.. _acl_grammar:
`` acl `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/acl.grammar.rst
.. _acl:
`` acl `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` acl `` statement assigns a symbolic name to an address match list.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
It gets its name from one of the primary uses of address match lists: Access
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Control Lists (ACLs).
The following ACLs are built-in:
`` any ``
Matches all hosts.
`` none ``
Matches no hosts.
`` localhost ``
Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network interfaces on the system. When addresses are added or removed, the `` localhost `` ACL element is updated to reflect the changes.
`` localnets ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network for which the system has an interface. When addresses are added or removed, the `` localnets `` ACL element is updated to reflect the changes. Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix lengths of local IPv6 addresses; in such cases, `` localnets `` only matches the local IPv6 addresses, just like `` localhost `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _controls_grammar:
`` controls `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/controls.grammar.rst
.. _controls_statement_definition_and_usage:
`` controls `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` controls `` statement declares control channels to be used by
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
system administrators to manage the operation of the name server. These
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
control channels are used by the `` rndc `` utility to send commands to
and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
An `` inet `` control channel is a TCP socket listening at the specified
`` ip_port `` on the specified `` ip_addr `` , which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address. An `` ip_addr `` of `` * `` (asterisk) is interpreted as the IPv4
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
wildcard address; connections are accepted on any of the system's
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IPv4 addresses. To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address, use an
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
`` ip_addr `` of `` :: `` . If `` rndc `` is only used on the local host,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
using the loopback address (`` 127.0.0.1 `` or `` ::1 `` ) is recommended for
maximum security.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If no port is specified, port 953 is used. The asterisk `` * `` cannot
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
be used for `` ip_port `` .
The ability to issue commands over the control channel is restricted by
the `` allow `` and `` keys `` clauses. Connections to the control channel
are permitted based on the `` address_match_list `` . This is for simple IP
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
address-based filtering only; any `` key_id `` elements of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` address_match_list `` are ignored.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A `` unix `` control channel is a Unix domain socket listening at the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specified path in the file system. Access to the socket is specified by
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
the `` perm `` , `` owner `` , and `` group `` clauses. Note that on some platforms
(SunOS and Solaris), the permissions (`` perm `` ) are applied to the parent
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
directory as the permissions on the socket itself are ignored.
The primary authorization mechanism of the command channel is the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` key_list `` , which contains a list of `` key_id ` ` s. Each ` ` key_id `` in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the `` key_list `` is authorized to execute commands over the control
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
channel. See :ref: `admin_tools` for information about
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configuring keys in `` rndc `` .
If the `` read-only `` clause is enabled, the control channel is limited
to the following set of read-only commands: `` nta -dump `` , `` null `` ,
`` status `` , `` showzone `` , `` testgen `` , and `` zonestatus `` . By default,
`` read-only `` is not enabled and the control channel allows read-write
access.
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
If no `` controls `` statement is present, `` named `` sets up a default
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1 and its IPv6
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
counterpart, ::1. In this case, and also when the `` controls `` statement
is present but does not have a `` keys `` clause, `` named `` attempts
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to load the command channel key from the file `` rndc.key `` in `` /etc ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
(or whatever `` sysconfdir `` was specified when BIND was built). To
create an `` rndc.key `` file, run `` rndc-confgen -a `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
To disable the command channel, use an empty `` controls `` statement:
`` controls { }; `` .
.. _include_grammar:
`` include `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
::
include filename;
.. _include_statement:
`` include `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` include `` statement inserts the specified file (or files if a valid glob
expression is detected) at the point where the `` include `` statement is
encountered. The `` include `` statement facilitates the administration of
configuration files by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
others. For example, the statement could include private keys that are readable
only by the name server.
.. _key_grammar:
`` key `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/key.grammar.rst
.. _key_statement:
`` key `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` key `` statement defines a shared secret key for use with TSIG (see
:ref: `tsig` ) or the command channel (see :ref: `controls_statement_definition_and_usage` ).
The `` key `` statement can occur at the top level of the configuration
file or inside a `` view `` statement. Keys defined in top-level `` key ``
statements can be used in all views. Keys intended for use in a
`` controls `` statement (see :ref: `controls_statement_definition_and_usage` )
must be defined at the top level.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` key_id `` , also known as the key name, is a domain name that uniquely
identifies the key. It can be used in a `` server `` statement to cause
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
requests sent to that server to be signed with this key, or in address
match lists to verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` algorithm_id `` is a string that specifies a security/authentication
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
algorithm. The `` named `` server supports `` hmac-md5 `` , `` hmac-sha1 `` ,
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
`` hmac-sha224 `` , `` hmac-sha256 `` , `` hmac-sha384 `` , and `` hmac-sha512 ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
TSIG authentication. Truncated hashes are supported by appending the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
minimum number of required bits preceded by a dash, e.g.,
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` hmac-sha1-80 `` . The `` secret_string `` is the secret to be used by the
algorithm, and is treated as a Base64-encoded string.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _logging_grammar:
`` logging `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/logging.grammar.rst
.. _logging_statement:
`` logging `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` logging `` statement configures a wide variety of logging options
for the name server. Its `` channel `` phrase associates output methods,
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
format options, and severity levels with a name that can then be used
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with the `` category `` phrase to select how various classes of messages
are logged.
Only one `` logging `` statement is used to define as many channels and
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
categories as desired. If there is no `` logging `` statement, the
logging configuration is:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
logging {
category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
category unmatched { null; };
};
If `` named `` is started with the `` -L `` option, it logs to the specified
file at startup, instead of using syslog. In this case the logging
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
configuration is:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
logging {
category default { default_logfile; default_debug; };
category unmatched { null; };
};
The logging configuration is only established when the entire
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
configuration file has been parsed. When the server starts up, all
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
logging messages regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to
the default channels, or to standard error if the `` -g `` option was
specified.
.. _channel:
The `` channel `` Phrase
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
All log output goes to one or more `` channels `` ; there is no limit to
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
the number of channels that can be created.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Every channel definition must include a destination clause that says
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, go to a particular
syslog facility, go to the standard error stream, or are discarded. The definition can
optionally also limit the message severity level that is accepted
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
by the channel (the default is `` info `` ), and whether to include a
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` named `` -generated time stamp, the category name, and/or the severity level
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(the default is not to include any).
The `` null `` destination clause causes all messages sent to the channel
to be discarded; in that case, other options for the channel are
meaningless.
The `` file `` destination clause directs the channel to a disk file. It
can include additional arguments to specify how large the file is
allowed to become before it is rolled to a backup file (`` size `` ), how
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
many backup versions of the file are saved each time this happens
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(`` versions `` ), and the format to use for naming backup versions
(`` suffix `` ).
The `` size `` option is used to limit log file growth. If the file ever
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
exceeds the specified size, then `` named `` stops writing to the file
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
unless it has a `` versions `` option associated with it. If backup
versions are kept, the files are rolled as described below. If there is
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
no `` versions `` option, no more data is written to the log until
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to less than the
maximum size. The default behavior is not to limit the size of the file.
File rolling only occurs when the file exceeds the size specified with
the `` size `` option. No backup versions are kept by default; any
existing log file is simply appended. The `` versions `` option specifies
how many backup versions of the file should be kept. If set to
`` unlimited `` , there is no limit.
The `` suffix `` option can be set to either `` increment `` or
`` timestamp `` . If set to `` timestamp `` , then when a log file is rolled,
it is saved with the current timestamp as a file suffix. If set to
`` increment `` , then backup files are saved with incrementing numbers as
suffixes; older files are renamed when rolling. For example, if
`` versions `` is set to 3 and `` suffix `` to `` increment `` , then when
`` filename.log `` reaches the size specified by `` size `` ,
`` filename.log.1 `` is renamed to `` filename.log.2 `` , `` filename.log.0 ``
is renamed to `` filename.log.1 `` , and `` filename.log `` is renamed to
`` filename.log.0 `` , whereupon a new `` filename.log `` is opened.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Here is an example using the `` size `` , `` versions `` , and `` suffix `` options:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
channel an_example_channel {
file "example.log" versions 3 size 20m suffix increment;
print-time yes;
print-category yes;
};
The `` syslog `` destination clause directs the channel to the system log.
Its argument is a syslog facility as described in the `` syslog `` man
page. Known facilities are `` kern `` , `` user `` , `` mail `` , `` daemon `` ,
`` auth `` , `` syslog `` , `` lpr `` , `` news `` , `` uucp `` , `` cron `` ,
`` authpriv `` , `` ftp `` , `` local0 `` , `` local1 `` , `` local2 `` , `` local3 `` ,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` local4 `` , `` local5 `` , `` local6 `` , and `` local7 `` ; however, not all
facilities are supported on all operating systems. How `` syslog ``
handles messages sent to this facility is described in the
`` syslog.conf `` man page. On a system which uses a very old
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
version of `` syslog `` , which only uses two arguments to the `` openlog() ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
function, this clause is silently ignored.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
On Windows machines, syslog messages are directed to the EventViewer.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` severity `` clause works like `` syslog `` 's "priorities," except
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
that they can also be used when writing straight to a file rather
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
than using `` syslog `` . Messages which are not at least of the severity
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
level given are not selected for the channel; messages of higher
severity levels are accepted.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When using `` syslog `` , the `` syslog.conf `` priorities
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
also determine what eventually passes through. For example, defining a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
channel facility and severity as `` daemon `` and `` debug `` , but only
logging `` daemon.warning `` via `` syslog.conf `` , causes messages of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
severity `` info `` and `` notice `` to be dropped. If the situation were
reversed, with `` named `` writing messages of only `` warning `` or higher,
then `` syslogd `` would print all messages it received from the channel.
The `` stderr `` destination clause directs the channel to the server's
standard error stream. This is intended for use when the server is
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
running as a foreground process, as when debugging a
configuration, for example.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The server can supply extensive debugging information when it is in
debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is greater than zero,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
debugging mode is active. The global debug level is set either
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
by starting the `` named `` server with the `` -d `` flag followed by a
positive integer, or by running `` rndc trace `` . The global debug level
can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running `` rndc
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
notrace`` . All debugging messages in the server have a debug level;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels that specify a
specific debug severity, for example:
::
channel specific_debug_level {
file "foo";
severity debug 3;
};
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the server is in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging level. Channels with
`` dynamic `` severity use the server's global debug level to determine
what messages to print.
`` print-time `` can be set to `` yes `` , `` no `` , or a time format
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
specifier, which may be one of `` local `` , `` iso8601 `` , or
`` iso8601-utc `` . If set to `` no `` , the date and time are not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
logged. If set to `` yes `` or `` local `` , the date and time are logged in
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
a human-readable format, using the local time zone. If set to
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` iso8601 `` , the local time is logged in ISO 8601 format. If set to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` iso8601-utc `` , the date and time are logged in ISO 8601 format,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with time zone set to UTC. The default is `` no `` .
`` print-time `` may be specified for a `` syslog `` channel, but it is
usually pointless since `` syslog `` also logs the date and time.
If `` print-category `` is requested, then the category of the message
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is logged as well. Finally, if `` print-severity `` is on, then the
severity level of the message is logged. The `` print- `` options may
be used in any combination, and are always printed in the following
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all three
`` print- `` options are on:
`` 28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` buffered `` has been turned on, the output to files is not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
flushed after each log entry. By default all log messages are flushed.
There are four predefined channels that are used for `` named `` 's default
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
logging, as follows. If `` named `` is started with the `` -L `` option, then a fifth
channel, `` default_logfile `` , is added. How they are used is described in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
:ref: `the_category_phrase` .
::
channel default_syslog {
// send to syslog's daemon facility
syslog daemon;
// only send priority info and higher
severity info;
};
channel default_debug {
// write to named.run in the working directory
// Note: stderr is used instead of "named.run" if
// the server is started with the '-g' option.
file "named.run";
// log at the server's current debug level
severity dynamic;
};
channel default_stderr {
// writes to stderr
stderr;
// only send priority info and higher
severity info;
};
channel null {
// toss anything sent to this channel
null;
};
channel default_logfile {
// this channel is only present if named is
// started with the -L option, whose argument
// provides the file name
file "...";
// log at the server's current debug level
severity dynamic;
};
The `` default_debug `` channel has the special property that it only
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
produces output when the server's debug level is non-zero. It normally
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
writes to a file called `` named.run `` in the server's working directory.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
For security reasons, when the `` -u `` command-line option is used, the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` named.run `` file is created only after `` named `` has changed to the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
new UID, and any debug output generated while `` named `` is starting -
and still running as root - is discarded. To capture this
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
output, run the server with the `` -L `` option to specify a
default logfile, or the `` -g `` option to log to standard error which can
be redirected to a file.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. The
built-in channels cannot be altered directly, but the default logging
can be modified by pointing categories at defined channels.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _the_category_phrase:
The `` category `` Phrase
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
There are many categories, so desired logs can be sent anywhere
while unwanted logs are ignored. If
a list of channels is not specified for a category, log messages in that
category are sent to the `` default `` category instead. If no
default category is specified, the following "default default" is used:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` named `` is started with the `` -L `` option, the default category
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is:
::
category default { default_logfile; default_debug; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
As an example, let's say a user wants to log security events to a file, but
also wants to keep the default logging behavior. They would specify the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
following:
::
channel my_security_channel {
file "my_security_file";
severity info;
};
category security {
my_security_channel;
default_syslog;
default_debug;
};
To discard all messages in a category, specify the `` null `` channel:
::
category xfer-out { null; };
category notify { null; };
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The following are the available categories and brief descriptions of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
types of log information they contain. More categories may be added in
future BIND releases.
.. include :: logging-categories.rst
.. _query_errors:
The `` query-errors `` Category
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The `` query-errors `` category is used to indicate why and how specific queries
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
resulted in responses which indicate an error. Normally, these messages are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
logged at `` debug `` logging levels; note, however, that if query logging is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
active, some are logged at `` info `` . The logging levels are described below:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
At `` debug `` level 1 or higher - or at `` info `` when query logging is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
active - each response with the rcode of SERVFAIL is logged as follows:
`` client 127.0.0.1#61502: query failed (SERVFAIL) for www.example.com/IN/AAAA at query.c:3880 ``
This means an error resulting in SERVFAIL was detected at line 3880 of source
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
file `` query.c `` . Log messages of this level are particularly helpful in identifying
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the cause of SERVFAIL for an authoritative server.
At `` debug `` level 2 or higher, detailed context information about recursive
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
resolutions that resulted in SERVFAIL is logged. The log message looks
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
like this:
::
fetch completed at resolver.c:2970 for www.example.com/A
in 10.000183: timed out/success [domain:example.com,
referral:2,restart:7,qrysent:8,timeout:5,lame:0,quota:0,neterr:0,
badresp:1,adberr:0,findfail:0,valfail:0]
The first part before the colon shows that a recursive resolution for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
AAAA records of www.example.com completed in 10.000183 seconds, and the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
final result that led to the SERVFAIL was determined at line 2970 of
source file `` resolver.c `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The next part shows the detected final result and the latest result of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSSEC validation. The latter is always "success" when no validation attempt
was made. In this example, this query probably resulted in SERVFAIL because all
name servers are down or unreachable, leading to a timeout in 10 seconds.
DNSSEC validation was probably not attempted.
The last part, enclosed in square brackets, shows statistics collected for this
particular resolution attempt. The `` domain `` field shows the deepest zone that
the resolver reached; it is the zone where the error was finally detected. The
meaning of the other fields is summarized in the following list.
`` referral ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The number of referrals the resolver received throughout the resolution process. In the above `` example.com `` there are two.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` restart ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The number of cycles that the resolver tried remote servers at the `` domain `` zone. In each cycle, the resolver sends one query (possibly resending it, depending on the response) to each known name server of the `` domain `` zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` qrysent ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The number of queries the resolver sent at the `` domain `` zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The number of timeouts the resolver received since the last response.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` lame ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The number of lame servers the resolver detected at the `` domain `` zone. A server is detected to be lame either by an invalid response or as a result of lookup in BIND 9's address database (ADB), where lame servers are cached.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` quota ``
The number of times the resolver was unable to send a query because it had exceeded the permissible fetch quota for a server.
`` neterr ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The number of erroneous results that the resolver encountered in sending queries at the `` domain `` zone. One common case is when the remote server is unreachable and the resolver receives an "ICMP unreachable" error message.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` badresp ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The number of unexpected responses (other than `` lame `` ) to queries sent by the resolver at the `` domain `` zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` adberr ``
Failures in finding remote server addresses of the`` domain `` zone in the ADB. One common case of this is that the remote server's name does not have any address records.
`` findfail ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Failures to resolve remote server addresses. This is a total number of failures throughout the resolution process.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` valfail ``
Failures of DNSSEC validation. Validation failures are counted throughout the resolution process (not limited to the `` domain `` zone), but should only happen in `` domain `` .
At `` debug `` level 3 or higher, the same messages as those at
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` debug `` level 1 are logged for errors other than
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
SERVFAIL. Note that negative responses such as NXDOMAIN are not errors, and are
not logged at this debug level.
At `` debug `` level 4 or higher, the detailed context information logged at
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` debug `` level 2 is logged for errors other than SERVFAIL and for negative
responses such as NXDOMAIN.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
.. _primaries_grammar:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries `` Statement Grammar
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
.. include :: ../misc/primaries.grammar.rst
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
.. _primaries_statement:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries `` Statement Definition and Usage
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries `` lists allow for a common set of primary servers to be easily
used by multiple stub and secondary zones in their `` primaries `` or
`` also-notify `` lists. (Note: `` primaries `` is a synonym for the original
keyword `` masters `` , which can still be used, but is no longer the
preferred terminology.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _options_grammar:
`` options `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This is the grammar of the `` options `` statement in the `` named.conf ``
file:
.. include :: ../misc/options.grammar.rst
.. _options:
`` options `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` options `` statement sets up global options to be used by BIND.
This statement may appear only once in a configuration file. If there is
no `` options `` statement, an options block with each option set to its
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
default is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` attach-cache ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option allows multiple views to share a single cache database. Each view has
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
its own cache database by default, but if multiple views have the
same operational policy for name resolution and caching, those views
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
can share a single cache to save memory, and possibly improve
resolution efficiency, by using this option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` attach-cache `` option may also be specified in `` view ``
statements, in which case it overrides the global `` attach-cache ``
option.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` cache_name `` specifies the cache to be shared. When the `` named ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server configures views which are supposed to share a cache, it
creates a cache with the specified name for the first view of these
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
sharing views. The rest of the views simply refer to the
already-created cache.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
One common configuration to share a cache is to allow all views
to share a single cache. This can be done by specifying
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` attach-cache `` as a global option with an arbitrary name.
Another possible operation is to allow a subset of all views to share
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
a cache while the others retain their own caches. For example, if
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
there are three views A, B, and C, and only A and B should share a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
cache, specify the `` attach-cache `` option as a view of A (or B)'s
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option, referring to the other view name:
::
view "A" {
// this view has its own cache
...
};
view "B" {
// this view refers to A's cache
attach-cache "A";
};
view "C" {
// this view has its own cache
...
};
Views that share a cache must have the same policy on configurable
parameters that may affect caching. The current implementation
requires the following configurable options be consistent among these
views: `` check-names `` , `` dnssec-accept-expired `` ,
`` dnssec-validation `` , `` max-cache-ttl `` , `` max-ncache-ttl `` ,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` max-stale-ttl `` , `` max-cache-size `` , `` min-cache-ttl `` ,
`` min-ncache-ttl `` , and `` zero-no-soa-ttl `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Note that there may be other parameters that may cause confusion if
they are inconsistent for different views that share a single cache.
For example, if these views define different sets of forwarders that
can return different answers for the same question, sharing the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
answer does not make sense or could even be harmful. It is the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
administrator's responsibility to ensure that configuration differences in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
different views do not cause disruption with a shared cache.
`` directory ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the working directory of the server. Any non-absolute pathnames in
the configuration file are taken as relative to this directory.
The default location for most server output files (e.g.,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` named.run `` ) is this directory. If a directory is not specified,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the working directory defaults to `` "." `` , the directory from
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
which the server was started. The directory specified should be an
absolute path, and *must* be writable by the effective user ID of the
`` named `` process.
`` dnstap ``
`` dnstap `` is a fast, flexible method for capturing and logging DNS
traffic. Developed by Robert Edmonds at Farsight Security, Inc., and
supported by multiple DNS implementations, `` dnstap `` uses
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` libfstrm `` (a lightweight high-speed framing library; see
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
https://github.com/farsightsec/fstrm) to send event payloads which
are encoded using Protocol Buffers (`` libprotobuf-c `` , a mechanism
for serializing structured data developed by Google, Inc.; see
https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/).
To enable `` dnstap `` at compile time, the `` fstrm `` and
`` protobuf-c `` libraries must be available, and BIND must be
configured with `` --enable-dnstap `` .
The `` dnstap `` option is a bracketed list of message types to be
logged. These may be set differently for each view. Supported types
are `` client `` , `` auth `` , `` resolver `` , `` forwarder `` , and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` update `` . Specifying type `` all `` causes all `` dnstap ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
messages to be logged, regardless of type.
Each type may take an additional argument to indicate whether to log
`` query `` messages or `` response `` messages; if not specified, both
queries and responses are logged.
Example: To log all authoritative queries and responses, recursive
client responses, and upstream queries sent by the resolver, use:
::
dnstap {
auth;
client response;
resolver query;
};
Logged `` dnstap `` messages can be parsed using the `` dnstap-read ``
utility (see :ref: `man_dnstap-read` for details).
For more information on `` dnstap `` , see http://dnstap.info.
The fstrm library has a number of tunables that are exposed in
`` named.conf `` , and can be modified if necessary to improve
performance or prevent loss of data. These are:
- `` fstrm-set-buffer-hint `` : The threshold number of bytes to
accumulate in the output buffer before forcing a buffer flush. The
minimum is 1024, the maximum is 65536, and the default is 8192.
- `` fstrm-set-flush-timeout `` : The number of seconds to allow
unflushed data to remain in the output buffer. The minimum is 1
second, the maximum is 600 seconds (10 minutes), and the default
is 1 second.
- `` fstrm-set-output-notify-threshold `` : The number of outstanding
queue entries to allow on an input queue before waking the I/O
thread. The minimum is 1 and the default is 32.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
- `` fstrm-set-output-queue-model `` : The queuing semantics
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to use for queue objects. The default is `` mpsc `` (multiple
producer, single consumer); the other option is `` spsc `` (single
producer, single consumer).
- `` fstrm-set-input-queue-size `` : The number of queue entries to
allocate for each input queue. This value must be a power of 2.
The minimum is 2, the maximum is 16384, and the default is 512.
- `` fstrm-set-output-queue-size `` : The number of queue entries to
allocate for each output queue. The minimum is 2, the maximum is
system-dependent and based on `` IOV_MAX `` , and the default is 64.
- `` fstrm-set-reopen-interval `` : The number of seconds to wait
between attempts to reopen a closed output stream. The minimum is
1 second, the maximum is 600 seconds (10 minutes), and the default
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
is 5 seconds. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
used to specify the value.
Note that all of the above minimum, maximum, and default values are
set by the `` libfstrm `` library, and may be subject to change in
future versions of the library. See the `` libfstrm `` documentation
for more information.
`` dnstap-output ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This configures the path to which the `` dnstap `` frame stream is sent
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
if `` dnstap `` is enabled at compile time and active.
The first argument is either `` file `` or `` unix `` , indicating whether
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the destination is a file or a Unix domain socket. The second
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
argument is the path of the file or socket. (Note: when using a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
socket, `` dnstap `` messages are only sent if another process such
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
as `` fstrm_capture `` (provided with `` libfstrm `` ) is listening on the
socket.)
If the first argument is `` file `` , then up to three additional
options can be added: `` size `` indicates the size to which a
`` dnstap `` log file can grow before being rolled to a new file;
`` versions `` specifies the number of rolled log files to retain; and
`` suffix `` indicates whether to retain rolled log files with an
incrementing counter as the suffix (`` increment `` ) or with the
current timestamp (`` timestamp `` ). These are similar to the `` size `` ,
`` versions `` , and `` suffix `` options in a `` logging `` channel. The
default is to allow `` dnstap `` log files to grow to any size without
rolling.
`` dnstap-output `` can only be set globally in `` options `` . Currently,
it can only be set once while `` named `` is running; once set, it
cannot be changed by `` rndc reload `` or `` rndc reconfig `` .
`` dnstap-identity ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies an `` identity `` string to send in `` dnstap `` messages. If
set to `` hostname `` , which is the default, the server's hostname
is sent. If set to `` none `` , no identity string is sent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` dnstap-version ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a `` version `` string to send in `` dnstap `` messages. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is the version number of the BIND release. If set to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` none `` , no version string is sent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` geoip-directory ``
When `` named `` is compiled using the MaxMind GeoIP2 geolocation API, this
specifies the directory containing GeoIP database files. By default, the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
option is set based on the prefix used to build the `` libmaxminddb `` module;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for example, if the library is installed in `` /usr/local/lib `` , then the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
default `` geoip-directory `` is `` /usr/local/share/GeoIP `` . On Windows,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the default is the `` named `` working directory. See :ref: `acl`
for details about `` geoip `` ACLs.
`` key-directory ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the directory where the public and private DNSSEC key files should be
found when performing a dynamic update of secure zones, if different
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
than the current working directory. (Note that this option has no
effect on the paths for files containing non-DNSSEC keys such as
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` bind.keys `` , `` rndc.key `` , or `` session.key `` .)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` lmdb-mapsize ``
When `` named `` is built with liblmdb, this option sets a maximum size
for the memory map of the new-zone database (NZD) in LMDB database
format. This database is used to store configuration information for
zones added using `` rndc addzone `` . Note that this is not the NZD
database file size, but the largest size that the database may grow
to.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Because the database file is memory-mapped, its size is limited by
the address space of the `` named `` process. The default of 32 megabytes
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
was chosen to be usable with 32-bit `` named `` builds. The largest
permitted value is 1 terabyte. Given typical zone configurations
without elaborate ACLs, a 32 MB NZD file ought to be able to hold
configurations of about 100,000 zones.
`` managed-keys-directory ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the directory in which to store the files that track managed DNSSEC
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
keys (i.e., those configured using the `` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
keywords in a `` trust-anchors `` statement). By default, this is the working
directory. The directory *must* be writable by the effective user ID of the
`` named `` process.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` named `` is not configured to use views, managed keys for
the server are tracked in a single file called
`` managed-keys.bind `` . Otherwise, managed keys are tracked in
separate files, one file per view; each file name is the view
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name (or, if it contains characters that are incompatible with use as
a file name, the SHA256 hash of the view name), followed by the
extension `` .mkeys `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(Note: in earlier releases, file names for views always used the
SHA256 hash of the view name. To ensure compatibility after upgrading,
if a file using the old name format is found to exist, it is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
used instead of the new format.)
`` max-ixfr-ratio ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the size threshold (expressed as a percentage of the size of the full
zone) beyond which `` named `` chooses to use an AXFR response rather than
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IXFR when answering zone transfer requests. See
:ref: `incremental_zone_transfers` .
`` new-zones-directory ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the directory in which to store the configuration
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
parameters for zones added via `` rndc addzone `` . By default, this is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the working directory. If set to a relative path, it is relative
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to the working directory. The directory *must* be writable by the
effective user ID of the `` named `` process.
`` qname-minimization ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option controls QNAME minimization behavior in the BIND
resolver. When set to `` strict `` , BIND follows the QNAME
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
minimization algorithm to the letter, as specified in :rfc: `7816` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Setting this option to `` relaxed `` causes BIND to fall back to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
normal (non-minimized) query mode when it receives either NXDOMAIN or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
other unexpected responses (e.g., SERVFAIL, improper zone cut,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
REFUSED) to a minimized query. `` disabled `` disables QNAME
minimization completely. The current default is `` relaxed `` , but it
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
may be changed to `` strict `` in a future release.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` tkey-gssapi-keytab ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the KRB5 keytab file to use for GSS-TSIG updates. If this option is
set and tkey-gssapi-credential is not set, updates are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
allowed with any key matching a principal in the specified keytab.
`` tkey-gssapi-credential ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the security credential with which the server should authenticate
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
keys requested by the GSS-TSIG protocol. Currently only Kerberos 5
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
authentication is available; the credential is a Kerberos
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
principal which the server can acquire through the default system key
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
file, normally `` /etc/krb5.keytab `` . The location of the keytab file can be
overridden using the `` tkey-gssapi-keytab `` option. Normally this
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
principal is of the form `` DNS/server.domain `` . To use
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
GSS-TSIG, `` tkey-domain `` must also be set if a specific keytab is
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
not set with `` tkey-gssapi-keytab `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` tkey-domain ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This domain is appended to the names of all shared keys generated with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` TKEY `` . When a client requests a `` TKEY `` exchange, it may or may
not specify the desired name for the key. If present, the name of the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
shared key is `` client-specified part `` + `` tkey-domain `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Otherwise, the name of the shared key is `` random hex digits ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
+ `` tkey-domain `` . In most cases, the `` domainname ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
should be the server's domain name, or an otherwise nonexistent
subdomain like `` _tkey.domainname `` . If using GSS-TSIG,
this variable must be defined, unless a specific keytab
is specified using `` tkey-gssapi-keytab `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` tkey-dhkey ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the Diffie-Hellman key used by the server to generate shared keys
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with clients using the Diffie-Hellman mode of `` TKEY `` . The server
must be able to load the public and private keys from files in the
working directory. In most cases, the `` key_name `` should be the
server's host name.
`` cache-file ``
This is for testing only. Do not use.
`` dump-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file the server dumps the database to, when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
instructed to do so with `` rndc dumpdb `` . If not specified, the
default is `` named_dump.db `` .
`` memstatistics-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file the server writes memory usage statistics to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
on exit. If not specified, the default is `` named.memstats `` .
`` lock-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of a file on which `` named `` attempts to acquire a
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
file lock when starting for the first time; if unsuccessful, the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
server terminates, under the assumption that another server
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is already running. If not specified, the default is
`` none `` .
Specifying `` lock-file none `` disables the use of a lock file.
`` lock-file `` is ignored if `` named `` was run using the `` -X ``
option, which overrides it. Changes to `` lock-file `` are ignored if
`` named `` is being reloaded or reconfigured; it is only effective
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
when the server is first started.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` pid-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file the server writes its process ID in. If not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specified, the default is `` /var/run/named/named.pid `` . The PID file
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is used by programs that send signals to the running name
server. Specifying `` pid-file none `` disables the use of a PID file;
no file is written and any existing one is removed. Note
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that `` none `` is a keyword, not a filename, and therefore is not
enclosed in double quotes.
`` recursing-file ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file where the server dumps the queries that are
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
currently recursing, when instructed to do so with `` rndc recursing `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If not specified, the default is `` named.recursing `` .
`` statistics-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file the server appends statistics to, when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
instructed to do so using `` rndc stats `` . If not specified, the
default is `` named.stats `` in the server's current directory. The
format of the file is described in :ref: `statsfile` .
`` bindkeys-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of a file to override the built-in trusted keys provided
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
by `` named `` . See the discussion of `` dnssec-validation `` for
details. If not specified, the default is `` /etc/bind.keys `` .
`` secroots-file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file the server dumps security roots to, when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
instructed to do so with `` rndc secroots `` . If not specified, the
default is `` named.secroots `` .
`` session-keyfile ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the pathname of the file into which to write a TSIG session key
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
generated by `` named `` for use by `` nsupdate -l `` . If not specified,
the default is `` /var/run/named/session.key `` . (See :ref: `dynamic_update_policies` ,
and in particular the discussion of the `` update-policy `` statement's
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` local `` option, for more information about this feature.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` session-keyname ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the key name to use for the TSIG session key. If not specified, the
default is `` local-ddns `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` session-keyalg ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the algorithm to use for the TSIG session key. Valid values are
hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384, hmac-sha512, and
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hmac-md5. If not specified, the default is hmac-sha256.
`` port ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This is the UDP/TCP port number the server uses to receive and send DNS
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
protocol traffic. The default is 53. This option is mainly intended
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for server testing; a server using a port other than 53 is not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
able to communicate with the global DNS.
`` dscp ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the global Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value to
classify outgoing DNS traffic, on operating systems that support DSCP.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Valid values are 0 through 63. It is not configured by default.
`` random-device ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a source of entropy to be used by the server; it is a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
device or file from which to read entropy. If it is a file,
operations requiring entropy will fail when the file has been
exhausted.
Entropy is needed for cryptographic operations such as TKEY
transactions, dynamic update of signed zones, and generation of TSIG
session keys. It is also used for seeding and stirring the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
pseudo-random number generator which is used for less critical
functions requiring randomness, such as generation of DNS message
transaction IDs.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If `` random-device `` is not specified, or if it is set to `` none `` ,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
entropy is read from the random number generation function
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
supplied by the cryptographic library with which BIND was linked
(i.e. OpenSSL or a PKCS#11 provider).
The `` random-device `` option takes effect during the initial
configuration load at server startup time and is ignored on
subsequent reloads.
`` preferred-glue ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If specified, the listed type (A or AAAA) is emitted before
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
other glue in the additional section of a query response. The default
is to prefer A records when responding to queries that arrived via
IPv4 and AAAA when responding to queries that arrived via IPv6.
.. _root-delegation-only:
`` root-delegation-only ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This turns on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs (top-level domains)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and root zones with an optional exclude list.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
DS queries are expected to be made to and be answered by delegation-only
zones. Such queries and responses are treated as an exception to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
delegation-only processing and are not converted to NXDOMAIN
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
responses, provided a CNAME is not discovered at the query name.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If a delegation-only zone server also serves a child zone, it is not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
always possible to determine whether an answer comes from the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
delegation-only zone or the child zone. SOA NS and DNSKEY records are
apex-only records and a matching response that contains these records
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
or DS is treated as coming from a child zone. RRSIG records are also
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
examined to see whether they are signed by a child zone, and the
authority section is examined to see if there is evidence that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the answer is from the child zone. Answers that are determined to be
from a child zone are not converted to NXDOMAIN responses. Despite
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
all these checks, there is still a possibility of false negatives when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
a child zone is being served.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Similarly, false positives can arise from empty nodes (no records at
the name) in the delegation-only zone when the query type is not `` ANY `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Note that some TLDs are not delegation-only; e.g., "DE", "LV", "US", and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
"MUSEUM". This list is not exhaustive.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
options {
root-delegation-only exclude { "de"; "lv"; "us"; "museum"; };
};
`` disable-algorithms ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This disables the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the specified
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name. Multiple `` disable-algorithms `` statements are allowed. Only
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the best-match `` disable-algorithms `` clause is used to
determine the algorithms.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If all supported algorithms are disabled, the zones covered by the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` disable-algorithms `` setting are treated as insecure.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-08-10 12:36:29 -07:00
Configured trust anchors in `` trust-anchors `` (or `` managed-keys `` or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` trusted-keys `` ) that match a disabled algorithm are ignored and treated
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
as if they were not configured.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` disable-ds-digests ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This disables the specified DS digest types at and below the specified
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name. Multiple `` disable-ds-digests `` statements are allowed. Only
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the best-match `` disable-ds-digests `` clause is used to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
determine the digest types.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If all supported digest types are disabled, the zones covered by
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` disable-ds-digests `` are treated as insecure.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` dnssec-must-be-secure ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies hierarchies which must be or may not be secure (signed and
validated). If `` yes `` , then `` named `` only accepts answers if
they are secure. If `` no `` , then normal DNSSEC validation applies,
allowing insecure answers to be accepted. The specified domain
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
must be defined as a trust anchor, for instance in a `` trust-anchors ``
statement, or `` dnssec-validation auto `` must be active.
`` dns64 ``
This directive instructs `` named `` to return mapped IPv4 addresses to
AAAA queries when there are no AAAA records. It is intended to be
used in conjunction with a NAT64. Each `` dns64 `` defines one DNS64
prefix. Multiple DNS64 prefixes can be defined.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Compatible IPv6 prefixes have lengths of 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, and 96, per
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
:rfc: `6052` . Bits 64..71 inclusive must be zero, with the most significant bit
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of the prefix in position 0.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
In addition, a reverse IP6.ARPA zone is created for the prefix
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to provide a mapping from the IP6.ARPA names to the corresponding
IN-ADDR.ARPA names using synthesized CNAMEs. `` dns64-server `` and
`` dns64-contact `` can be used to specify the name of the server and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
contact for the zones. These can be set at the view/options
level but not on a per-prefix basis.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Each `` dns64 `` supports an optional `` clients `` ACL that determines
which clients are affected by this directive. If not defined, it
defaults to `` any; `` .
Each `` dns64 `` supports an optional `` mapped `` ACL that selects which
IPv4 addresses are to be mapped in the corresponding A RRset. If not
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
defined, it defaults to `` any; `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Normally, DNS64 does not apply to a domain name that owns one or more
AAAA records; these records are simply returned. The optional
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` exclude `` ACL allows specification of a list of IPv6 addresses that
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are ignored if they appear in a domain name's AAAA records;
DNS64 is applied to any A records the domain name owns. If not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
defined, `` exclude `` defaults to ::ffff:0.0.0.0/96.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
An optional `` suffix `` can also be defined to set the bits trailing
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the mapped IPv4 address bits. By default these bits are set to
`` :: `` . The bits matching the prefix and mapped IPv4 address must be
zero.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` recursive-only `` is set to `` yes `` , the DNS64 synthesis only
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
happens for recursive queries. The default is `` no `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` break-dnssec `` is set to `` yes `` , the DNS64 synthesis happens
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
even if the result, if validated, would cause a DNSSEC validation
failure. If this option is set to `` no `` (the default), the DO is set
on the incoming query, and there are RRSIGs on the applicable
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
records, then synthesis does not happen.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
acl rfc1918 { 10/8; 192.168/16; 172.16/12; };
dns64 64:FF9B::/96 {
clients { any; };
mapped { !rfc1918; any; };
exclude { 64:FF9B::/96; ::ffff:0000:0000/96; };
suffix ::;
};
`` dnssec-loadkeys-interval ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
When a zone is configured with `` auto-dnssec maintain; `` , its key
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
repository must be checked periodically to see if any new keys have
been added or any existing keys' timing metadata has been updated
(see :ref: `man_dnssec-keygen` and :ref: `man_dnssec-settime` ).
The `` dnssec-loadkeys-interval `` option
sets the frequency of automatic repository checks, in minutes. The
default is `` 60 `` (1 hour), the minimum is `` 1 `` (1 minute), and
the maximum is `` 1440 `` (24 hours); any higher value is silently
reduced.
`` dnssec-policy ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which key and signing policy (KASP) should be used for this zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This is a string referring to a `` dnssec-policy `` statement. There are two
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
built-in policies: `` default `` , which uses the default policy, and
`` none `` , which means no DNSSEC policy and keeps the zone unsigned. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` none `` . See :ref:`dnssec-policy Grammar
<dnssec_policy_grammar>` for more details.
`` dnssec-update-mode ``
If this option is set to its default value of `` maintain `` in a zone
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
of type `` primary `` which is DNSSEC-signed and configured to allow
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
dynamic updates (see :ref: `dynamic_update_policies` ), and if `` named `` has access
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to the private signing key(s) for the zone, then `` named ``
automatically signs all new or changed records and maintains signatures
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for the zone by regenerating RRSIG records whenever they approach
their expiration date.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the option is changed to `` no-resign `` , then `` named `` signs
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
all new or changed records, but scheduled maintenance of signatures
is disabled.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
With either of these settings, `` named `` rejects updates to a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSSEC-signed zone when the signing keys are inactive or unavailable
to `` named `` . (A planned third option, `` external `` , will disable all
automatic signing and allow DNSSEC data to be submitted into a zone
via dynamic update; this is not yet implemented.)
`` nta-lifetime ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the default lifetime, in seconds, for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
negative trust anchors added via `` rndc nta `` .
A negative trust anchor selectively disables DNSSEC validation for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zones that are known to be failing because of misconfiguration, rather
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
than an attack. When data to be validated is at or below an active
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
NTA (and above any other configured trust anchors), `` named ``
aborts the DNSSEC validation process and treats the data as insecure
rather than bogus. This continues until the NTA's lifetime has
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
elapsed. NTAs persist across `` named `` restarts.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes can be used to specify the NTA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
lifetime in seconds, minutes, or hours. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
formats.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` nta-lifetime `` defaults to one hour; it cannot exceed one week.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` nta-recheck ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies how often to check whether negative trust anchors added via
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` rndc nta `` are still necessary.
A negative trust anchor is normally used when a domain has stopped
validating due to operator error; it temporarily disables DNSSEC
validation for that domain. In the interest of ensuring that DNSSEC
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
validation is turned back on as soon as possible, `` named ``
periodically sends a query to the domain, ignoring negative trust
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
anchors, to find out whether it can now be validated. If so, the
negative trust anchor is allowed to expire early.
Validity checks can be disabled for an individual NTA by using
`` rndc nta -f `` , or for all NTAs by setting `` nta-recheck `` to zero.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes can be used to specify the NTA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
recheck interval in seconds, minutes, or hours. It also accepts ISO 8601
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
duration formats.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The default is five minutes. It cannot be longer than `` nta-lifetime `` , which
cannot be longer than a week.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` max-zone-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a maximum permissible TTL value in seconds. For
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used to specify the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
maximum value. When loading a zone file using a `` masterfile-format ``
of `` text `` or `` raw `` , any record encountered with a TTL higher than
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` max-zone-ttl `` causes the zone to be rejected.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This is useful in DNSSEC-signed zones because when rolling to a new
DNSKEY, the old key needs to remain available until RRSIG records
have expired from caches. The `` max-zone-ttl `` option guarantees that
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the largest TTL in the zone is no higher than the set value.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
(Note: because `` map `` -format files load directly into memory, this
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option cannot be used with them.)
The default value is `` unlimited `` . A `` max-zone-ttl `` of zero is
treated as `` unlimited `` .
`` stale-answer-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the TTL to be returned on stale answers. The default is 1
second. The minimum allowed is also 1 second; a value of 0 is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
updated silently to 1 second.
For stale answers to be returned, they must be enabled, either in the
configuration file using `` stale-answer-enable `` or via
`` rndc serve-stale on `` .
`` serial-update-method ``
Zones configured for dynamic DNS may use this option to set the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
update method to be used for the zone serial number in the SOA
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
record.
With the default setting of `` serial-update-method increment; `` , the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
SOA serial number is incremented by one each time the zone is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
updated.
When set to `` serial-update-method unixtime; `` , the SOA serial number
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is set to the number of seconds since the Unix epoch, unless the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
serial number is already greater than or equal to that value, in
which case it is simply incremented by one.
When set to `` serial-update-method date; `` , the new SOA serial number
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is the current date in the form "YYYYMMDD", followed by two
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
zeroes, unless the existing serial number is already greater than or
equal to that value, in which case it is incremented by one.
`` zone-statistics ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` full `` , the server collects statistical data on all zones,
unless specifically turned off on a per-zone basis by specifying
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` zone-statistics terse `` or `` zone-statistics none `` in the `` zone ``
2020-09-21 11:03:30 +02:00
statement. The statistical data includes, for example, DNSSEC signing
operations and the number of authoritative answers per query type. The
2020-09-10 12:37:29 +02:00
default is `` terse `` , providing minimal statistics on zones
(including name and current serial number, but not query type
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
counters).
These statistics may be accessed via the `` statistics-channel `` or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
using `` rndc stats `` , which dumps them to the file listed in the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` statistics-file `` . See also :ref: `statsfile` .
For backward compatibility with earlier versions of BIND 9, the
`` zone-statistics `` option can also accept `` yes `` or `` no `` ; `` yes ``
has the same meaning as `` full `` . As of BIND 9.10, `` no `` has the
same meaning as `` none `` ; previously, it was the same as `` terse `` .
.. _boolean_options:
Boolean Options
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
`` automatic-interface-scan ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` and supported by the operating system, this automatically rescans
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
network interfaces when the interface addresses are added or removed. The
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
default is `` yes `` . This configuration option does not affect the time-based
`` interface-interval `` option; it is recommended to set the time-based
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` interface-interval `` to 0 when the operator confirms that automatic
interface scanning is supported by the operating system.
The `` automatic-interface-scan `` implementation uses routing sockets for the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
network interface discovery; therefore, the operating system must
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
support the routing sockets for this feature to work.
`` allow-new-zones ``
If `` yes `` , then zones can be added at runtime via `` rndc addzone `` .
The default is `` no `` .
Newly added zones' configuration parameters are stored so that they
can persist after the server is restarted. The configuration
information is saved in a file called `` viewname.nzf `` (or, if
`` named `` is compiled with liblmdb, in an LMDB database file called
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` viewname.nzd `` ). "viewname" is the name of the view, unless the view
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name contains characters that are incompatible with use as a file
name, in which case a cryptographic hash of the view name is used
instead.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Configurations for zones added at runtime are stored either in
a new-zone file (NZF) or a new-zone database (NZD), depending on
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
whether `` named `` was linked with liblmdb at compile time. See
:ref: `man_rndc` for further details about `` rndc addzone `` .
`` auth-nxdomain ``
If `` yes `` , then the `` AA `` bit is always set on NXDOMAIN responses,
even if the server is not actually authoritative. The default is
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` no `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` deallocate-on-exit ``
This option was used in BIND 8 to enable checking for memory leaks on
exit. BIND 9 ignores the option and always performs the checks.
`` memstatistics ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This writes memory statistics to the file specified by
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` memstatistics-file `` at exit. The default is `` no `` unless `` -m
record`` is specified on the command line, in which case it is ` ` yes `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` dialup ``
If `` yes `` , then the server treats all zones as if they are doing
zone transfers across a dial-on-demand dialup link, which can be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
brought up by traffic originating from this server. Although this setting has
different effects according to zone type, it concentrates the zone
maintenance so that everything happens quickly, once every
`` heartbeat-interval `` , ideally during a single call. It also
suppresses some normal zone maintenance traffic. The default
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is `` no `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If specified in the `` view `` and
`` zone `` statements, the `` dialup `` option overrides the global `` dialup ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the zone is a primary zone, the server sends out a NOTIFY
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
request to all the secondaries (default). This should trigger the zone
serial number check in the secondary (providing it supports NOTIFY),
allowing the secondary to verify the zone while the connection is active.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled by
`` notify `` and `` also-notify `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the zone is a secondary or stub zone, the server suppresses
the regular "zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only performs them
when the `` heartbeat-interval `` expires, in addition to sending NOTIFY
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
requests.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Finer control can be achieved by using `` notify `` , which only sends
NOTIFY messages; `` notify-passive `` , which sends NOTIFY messages and
suppresses the normal refresh queries; `` refresh `` , which suppresses
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
normal refresh processing and sends refresh queries when the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` heartbeat-interval `` expires; and `` passive `` , which disables
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
normal refresh processing.
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| dialup mode | normal refresh | heart-beat | heart-beat |
| | | refresh | notify |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` no `` | yes | no | no |
| (default) | | | |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` yes `` | no | yes | yes |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` notify `` | yes | no | yes |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` refresh `` | no | yes | no |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` passive `` | no | no | no |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
| `` notify-passive `` | no | no | yes |
+--------------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by `` dialup `` .
`` flush-zones-on-shutdown ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When the name server exits upon receiving SIGTERM, flush or do not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
flush any pending zone writes. The default is
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` flush-zones-on-shutdown no `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` geoip-use-ecs ``
This option was part of an experimental implementation of the EDNS
CLIENT-SUBNET for authoritative servers, but is now obsolete.
`` root-key-sentinel ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , respond to root key sentinel probes as described in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
draft-ietf-dnsop-kskroll-sentinel-08. The default is `` yes `` .
`` message-compression ``
If `` yes `` , DNS name compression is used in responses to regular
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
queries (not including AXFR or IXFR, which always use compression).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Setting this option to `` no `` reduces CPU usage on servers and may
improve throughput. However, it increases response size, which may
cause more queries to be processed using TCP; a server with
compression disabled is out of compliance with :rfc: `1123` Section
6.1.3.2. The default is `` yes `` .
`` minimal-responses ``
This option controls the addition of records to the authority and
additional sections of responses. Such records may be included in
responses to be helpful to clients; for example, NS or MX records may
have associated address records included in the additional section,
obviating the need for a separate address lookup. However, adding
these records to responses is not mandatory and requires additional
database lookups, causing extra latency when marshalling responses.
`` minimal-responses `` takes one of four values:
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
- `` no `` : the server is as complete as possible when generating
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
responses.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
- `` yes `` : the server only adds records to the authority and additional
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sections when such records are required by the DNS protocol (for
example, when returning delegations or negative responses). This
provides the best server performance but may result in more client
queries.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
- `` no-auth `` : the server omits records from the authority section except
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
when they are required, but it may still add records to the
additional section.
- `` no-auth-recursive `` : the same as `` no-auth `` when recursion is requested
in the query (RD=1), or the same as `` no `` if recursion is not requested.
`` no-auth `` and `` no-auth-recursive `` are useful when answering stub
clients, which usually ignore the authority section.
`` no-auth-recursive `` is meant for use in mixed-mode servers that
handle both authoritative and recursive queries.
The default is `` no-auth-recursive `` .
`` glue-cache ``
When set to `` yes `` , a cache is used to improve query performance
when adding address-type (A and AAAA) glue records to the additional
section of DNS response messages that delegate to a child zone.
The glue cache uses memory proportional to the number of delegations
in the zone. The default setting is `` yes `` , which improves
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
performance at the cost of increased memory usage for the zone. To avoid
this, set it to `` no `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-16 11:18:07 +02:00
.. note :: This option is deprecated and its use is discouraged. The
glue cache will be permanently *enabled* in a future release.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` minimal-any ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If set to `` yes `` , the server replies with only one of
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the RRsets for the query name, and its covering RRSIGs if any,
when generating a positive response to a query of type ANY over UDP,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
instead of replying with all known RRsets for the name. Similarly, a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
query for type RRSIG is answered with the RRSIG records covering
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
only one type. This can reduce the impact of some kinds of attack
traffic, without harming legitimate clients. (Note, however, that the
RRset returned is the first one found in the database; it is not
necessarily the smallest available RRset.) Additionally,
`` minimal-responses `` is turned on for these queries, so no
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
unnecessary records are added to the authority or additional
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sections. The default is `` no `` .
`` notify ``
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
If set to `` yes `` (the default), DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a
zone the server is authoritative for changes; see :ref: `notify` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The messages are sent to the servers listed in the zone's NS records
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
(except the primary server identified in the SOA MNAME field), and to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
any servers listed in the `` also-notify `` option.
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
If set to `` primary-only `` (or the older keyword `` master-only `` ),
notifies are only sent for primary zones. If set to `` explicit `` ,
notifies are sent only to servers explicitly listed using
`` also-notify `` . If set to `` no `` , no notifies are sent.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` notify `` option may also be specified in the `` zone ``
statement, in which case it overrides the `` options notify ``
statement. It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
caused secondary zones to crash.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` notify-to-soa ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , do not check the name servers in the NS RRset against the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
SOA MNAME. Normally a NOTIFY message is not sent to the SOA MNAME
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(SOA ORIGIN), as it is supposed to contain the name of the ultimate
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
primary server. Sometimes, however, a secondary server is listed as the SOA MNAME in
hidden primary configurations; in that case, the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
ultimate primary should be set to still send NOTIFY messages to all the name servers
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
listed in the NS RRset.
`` recursion ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , and a DNS query requests recursion, then the server
attempts to do all the work required to answer the query. If recursion
is off and the server does not already know the answer, it
returns a referral response. The default is `` yes `` . Note that setting
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` recursion no `` does not prevent clients from getting data from the
server's cache; it only prevents new data from being cached as an
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
effect of client queries. Caching may still occur as an effect of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server's internal operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
`` request-nsid ``
If `` yes `` , then an empty EDNS(0) NSID (Name Server Identifier)
option is sent with all queries to authoritative name servers during
iterative resolution. If the authoritative server returns an NSID
option in its response, then its contents are logged in the `` nsid ``
category at level `` info `` . The default is `` no `` .
`` request-sit ``
This experimental option is obsolete.
`` require-server-cookie ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , require a valid server cookie before sending a full response to a UDP
request from a cookie-aware client. BADCOOKIE is sent if there is a
bad or nonexistent server cookie.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` no `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Users wishing to test that DNS COOKIE clients correctly handle
BADCOOKIE, or who are getting a lot of forged DNS requests with DNS COOKIES
present, should set this to `` yes `` . Setting this to `` yes `` results in a reduced amplification effect
in a reflection attack, as the BADCOOKIE response is smaller than a full
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
response, while also requiring a legitimate client to follow up with a second
query with the new, valid, cookie.
`` answer-cookie ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When set to the default value of `` yes `` , COOKIE EDNS options are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sent when applicable in replies to client queries. If set to `` no `` ,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
COOKIE EDNS options are not sent in replies. This can only be set
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
at the global options level, not per-view.
`` answer-cookie no `` is intended as a temporary measure, for use when
`` named `` shares an IP address with other servers that do not yet
support DNS COOKIE. A mismatch between servers on the same address is
not expected to cause operational problems, but the option to disable
COOKIE responses so that all servers have the same behavior is
provided out of an abundance of caution. DNS COOKIE is an important
security mechanism, and should not be disabled unless absolutely
necessary.
`` send-cookie ``
If `` yes `` , then a COOKIE EDNS option is sent along with the query.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the resolver has previously communicated with the server, the COOKIE
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
returned in the previous transaction is sent. This is used by the
server to determine whether the resolver has talked to it before. A
resolver sending the correct COOKIE is assumed not to be an off-path
attacker sending a spoofed-source query; the query is therefore
unlikely to be part of a reflection/amplification attack, so
resolvers sending a correct COOKIE option are not subject to response
rate limiting (RRL). Resolvers which do not send a correct COOKIE
option may be limited to receiving smaller responses via the
`` nocookie-udp-size `` option.
The default is `` yes `` .
`` stale-answer-enable ``
2020-07-21 10:38:55 +02:00
If `` yes `` , enable the returning of "stale" cached answers when the name
servers for a zone are not answering and the `` stale-cache-enable `` option is
also enabled. The default is not to return stale answers.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Stale answers can also be enabled or disabled at runtime via
`` rndc serve-stale on `` or `` rndc serve-stale off `` ; these override
the configured setting. `` rndc serve-stale reset `` restores the
setting to the one specified in `` named.conf `` . Note that if stale
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
answers have been disabled by `` rndc `` , they cannot be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
re-enabled by reloading or reconfiguring `` named `` ; they must be
re-enabled with `` rndc serve-stale on `` , or the server must be
restarted.
Information about stale answers is logged under the `` serve-stale ``
log category.
2020-07-21 10:38:55 +02:00
`` stale-cache-enable ``
If `` yes `` , enable the retaining of "stale" cached answers. Default `` no `` .
2020-11-04 20:02:58 -03:00
`` stale-refresh-time ``
If the name servers for a given zone are not answering, this sets the time
window for which `` named `` will promptly return "stale" cached answers for
that RRSet being requested before a new attempt in contacting the servers
is made. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used to
specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
The default `` stale-refresh-time `` is 30 seconds, as RFC 8767 recommends
that attempts to refresh to be done no more frequently than every 30
seconds. A value of zero disables the feature, meaning that normal
resolution will take place first, if that fails only then `` named `` will
return "stale" cached answers.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` nocookie-udp-size ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum size of UDP responses that are sent to queries
without a valid server COOKIE. A value below 128 is silently
2020-09-23 14:47:26 +02:00
raised to 128. The default value is 1232, but the `` max-udp-size ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option may further limit the response size.
`` sit-secret ``
This experimental option is obsolete.
`` cookie-algorithm ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the algorithm to be used when generating the server cookie; the options are
"aes", "sha1", or "sha256". The default is "aes" if supported by
the cryptographic library; otherwise, "sha256".
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` cookie-secret ``
If set, this is a shared secret used for generating and verifying
EDNS COOKIE options within an anycast cluster. If not set, the system
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
generates a random secret at startup. The shared secret is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
encoded as a hex string and needs to be 128 bits for AES128, 160 bits
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for SHA1, and 256 bits for SHA256.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If there are multiple secrets specified, the first one listed in
`` named.conf `` is used to generate new server cookies. The others
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are only used to verify returned cookies.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` response-padding ``
The EDNS Padding option is intended to improve confidentiality when
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
DNS queries are sent over an encrypted channel, by reducing the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
variability in packet sizes. If a query:
1. contains an EDNS Padding option,
2. includes a valid server cookie or uses TCP,
3. is not signed using TSIG or SIG(0), and
4. is from a client whose address matches the specified ACL,
then the response is padded with an EDNS Padding option to a multiple
of `` block-size `` bytes. If these conditions are not met, the
response is not padded.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` block-size `` is 0 or the ACL is `` none; `` , this feature is
disabled and no padding occurs; this is the default. If
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` block-size `` is greater than 512, a warning is logged and the value
is truncated to 512. Block sizes are ordinarily expected to be powers
of two (for instance, 128), but this is not mandatory.
`` trust-anchor-telemetry ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This causes `` named `` to send specially formed queries once per day to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
domains for which trust anchors have been configured via, e.g.,
2020-09-10 11:38:07 +02:00
`` trust-anchors `` or `` dnssec-validation auto `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The query name used for these queries has the form
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` _ta-xxxx(-xxxx)(...).<domain> `` , where each "xxxx" is a group of four
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hexadecimal digits representing the key ID of a trusted DNSSEC key.
The key IDs for each domain are sorted smallest to largest prior to
encoding. The query type is NULL.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
By monitoring these queries, zone operators are able to see which
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
resolvers have been updated to trust a new key; this may help them
decide when it is safe to remove an old one.
The default is `` yes `` .
`` use-ixfr ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
*This option is obsolete* . To disable IXFR to a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
particular server or servers, see the information on the
`` provide-ixfr `` option in :ref: `server_statement_definition_and_usage` .
See also :ref: `incremental_zone_transfers` .
`` provide-ixfr ``
See the description of `` provide-ixfr `` in :ref: `server_statement_definition_and_usage` .
`` request-ixfr ``
See the description of `` request-ixfr `` in :ref: `server_statement_definition_and_usage` .
`` request-expire ``
See the description of `` request-expire `` in :ref: `server_statement_definition_and_usage` .
`` match-mapped-addresses ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` yes `` , then an IPv4-mapped IPv6 address matches any
address-match list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This option was introduced to work around a kernel quirk in some
operating systems that causes IPv4 TCP connections, such as zone
transfers, to be accepted on an IPv6 socket using mapped addresses.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This caused address-match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
However, `` named `` now solves this problem internally. The use of
this option is discouraged.
`` ixfr-from-differences ``
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
When `` yes `` and the server loads a new version of a primary zone from
its zone file or receives a new version of a secondary file via zone
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
transfer, it compares the new version to the previous one and
calculates a set of differences. The differences are then logged in
the zone's journal file so that the changes can be transmitted to
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
downstream secondaries as an incremental zone transfer.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for non-dynamic
zones, this option saves bandwidth at the expense of increased CPU
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
and memory consumption at the primary server. In particular, if the new
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
version of a zone is completely different from the previous one, the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
set of differences is of a size comparable to the combined size
of the old and new zone versions, and the server needs to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete difference set.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` ixfr-from-differences `` also accepts `` primary ``
and `` secondary `` at the view and options levels,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
which causes `` ixfr-from-differences `` to be enabled for all primary
or secondary zones, respectively. It is off for all zones by default.
Note: if inline signing is enabled for a zone, the user-provided
`` ixfr-from-differences `` setting is ignored for that zone.
`` multi-master ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This should be set when there are multiple primary servers for a zone and the
addresses refer to different machines. If `` yes `` , `` named `` does not
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
log when the serial number on the primary is less than what `` named ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
currently has. The default is `` no `` .
`` auto-dnssec ``
Zones configured for dynamic DNS may use this option to allow varying
levels of automatic DNSSEC key management. There are three possible
settings:
`` auto-dnssec allow; `` permits keys to be updated and the zone fully
re-signed whenever the user issues the command `` rndc sign zonename `` .
`` auto-dnssec maintain; `` includes the above, but also
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
automatically adjusts the zone's DNSSEC keys on a schedule, according
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to the keys' timing metadata (see :ref: `man_dnssec-keygen` and
:ref: `man_dnssec-settime` ). The command `` rndc sign zonename ``
causes `` named `` to load keys from the key repository and sign the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone with all keys that are active. `` rndc loadkeys zonename ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
causes `` named `` to load keys from the key repository and schedule
key maintenance events to occur in the future, but it does not sign
the full zone immediately. Note: once keys have been loaded for a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone the first time, the repository is searched for changes
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
periodically, regardless of whether `` rndc loadkeys `` is used. The
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
recheck interval is defined by `` dnssec-loadkeys-interval `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default setting is `` auto-dnssec off `` .
`` dnssec-enable ``
This option is obsolete and has no effect.
.. _dnssec-validation-option:
`` dnssec-validation ``
This option enables DNSSEC validation in `` named `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If set to `` auto `` , DNSSEC validation is enabled and a default trust
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
anchor for the DNS root zone is used.
If set to `` yes `` , DNSSEC validation is enabled, but a trust anchor must be
manually configured using a `` trust-anchors `` statement (or the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` managed-keys `` or `` trusted-keys `` statements, both deprecated). If
there is no configured trust anchor, validation does not take place.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If set to `` no `` , DNSSEC validation is disabled.
The default is `` auto `` , unless BIND is built with
`` configure --disable-auto-validation `` , in which case the default is
`` yes `` .
The default root trust anchor is stored in the file `` bind.keys `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` loads that key at startup if `` dnssec-validation `` is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
set to `` auto `` . A copy of the file is installed along with BIND 9,
and is current as of the release date. If the root key expires, a new
copy of `` bind.keys `` can be downloaded from
https://www.isc.org/bind-keys.
(To prevent problems if `` bind.keys `` is not found, the current trust
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
anchor is also compiled in `` named `` . Relying on this is not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
recommended, however, as it requires `` named `` to be recompiled with
a new key when the root key expires.)
.. note :: `` named `` loads *only* the root key from `` bind.keys `` . The file
cannot be used to store keys for other zones. The root key in
`` bind.keys `` is ignored if `` dnssec-validation auto `` is not in
use.
Whenever the resolver sends out queries to an EDNS-compliant
server, it always sets the DO bit indicating it can support DNSSEC
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
responses, even if `` dnssec-validation `` is off.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` validate-except ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a list of domain names at and beneath which DNSSEC
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
validation should *not* be performed, regardless of the presence of a
trust anchor at or above those names. This may be used, for example,
when configuring a top-level domain intended only for local use, so
that the lack of a secure delegation for that domain in the root zone
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
does not cause validation failures. (This is similar to setting a
negative trust anchor except that it is a permanent configuration,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
whereas negative trust anchors expire and are removed after a set
period of time.)
`` dnssec-accept-expired ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This accepts expired signatures when verifying DNSSEC signatures. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` no `` . Setting this option to `` yes `` leaves `` named ``
vulnerable to replay attacks.
`` querylog ``
Query logging provides a complete log of all incoming queries and all query
errors. This provides more insight into the server's activity, but with a
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
cost to performance which may be significant on heavily loaded servers.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` querylog `` option specifies whether query logging should be active when
`` named `` first starts. If `` querylog `` is not specified, then query logging
is determined by the presence of the logging category `` queries `` . Query
logging can also be activated at runtime using the command `` rndc querylog
on`` , or deactivated with ` ` rndc querylog off `` .
`` check-names ``
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
certain domain names in primary files and/or DNS responses received
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
from the network. The default varies according to usage area. For
2020-06-16 17:48:42 -07:00
`` primary `` zones the default is `` fail `` . For `` secondary `` zones the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` warn `` . For answers received from the network
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(`` response `` ), the default is `` ignore `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The rules for legal hostnames and mail domains are derived from
:rfc: `952` and :rfc: `821` as modified by :rfc: `1123` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` check-names `` applies to the owner names of A, AAAA, and MX records.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
It also applies to the domain names in the RDATA of NS, SOA, MX, and
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
SRV records. It further applies to the RDATA of PTR records where the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
owner name indicates that it is a reverse lookup of a hostname (the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
owner name ends in IN-ADDR.ARPA, IP6.ARPA, or IP6.INT).
`` check-dup-records ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This checks primary zones for records that are treated as different by
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSSEC but are semantically equal in plain DNS. The default is to
`` warn `` . Other possible values are `` fail `` and `` ignore `` .
`` check-mx ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This checks whether the MX record appears to refer to an IP address. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is to `` warn `` . Other possible values are `` fail `` and
`` ignore `` .
`` check-wildcard ``
This option is used to check for non-terminal wildcards. The use of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
non-terminal wildcards is almost always as a result of a lack of
understanding of the wildcard matching algorithm (:rfc: `1034` ). This option
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
affects primary zones. The default (`` yes `` ) is to check for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
non-terminal wildcards and issue a warning.
`` check-integrity ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This performs post-load zone integrity checks on primary zones. It checks
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that MX and SRV records refer to address (A or AAAA) records and that
glue address records exist for delegated zones. For MX and SRV
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
records, only in-zone hostnames are checked (for out-of-zone hostnames,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
use `` named-checkzone `` ). For NS records, only names below top-of-zone
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
are checked (for out-of-zone names and glue consistency checks, use
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` named-checkzone `` ). The default is `` yes `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The use of the SPF record to publish Sender Policy Framework is
deprecated, as the migration from using TXT records to SPF records was
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
abandoned. Enabling this option also checks that a TXT Sender Policy
Framework record exists (starts with "v=spf1") if there is an SPF
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
record. Warnings are emitted if the TXT record does not exist; they can
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
be suppressed with `` check-spf `` .
`` check-mx-cname ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` check-integrity `` is set, then fail, warn, or ignore MX records
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that refer to CNAMES. The default is to `` warn `` .
`` check-srv-cname ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` check-integrity `` is set, then fail, warn, or ignore SRV records
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that refer to CNAMES. The default is to `` warn `` .
`` check-sibling ``
When performing integrity checks, also check that sibling glue
exists. The default is `` yes `` .
`` check-spf ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` check-integrity `` is set, check that there is a TXT Sender
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Policy Framework record present (starts with "v=spf1") if there is an
SPF record present. The default is `` warn `` .
`` zero-no-soa-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , when returning authoritative negative responses to SOA queries, set
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the TTL of the SOA record returned in the authority section to zero.
The default is `` yes `` .
`` zero-no-soa-ttl-cache ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` yes `` , when caching a negative response to an SOA query set the TTL to zero.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` no `` .
`` update-check-ksk ``
When set to the default value of `` yes `` , check the KSK bit in each
key to determine how the key should be used when generating RRSIGs
for a secure zone.
Ordinarily, zone-signing keys (that is, keys without the KSK bit set)
are used to sign the entire zone, while key-signing keys (keys with
the KSK bit set) are only used to sign the DNSKEY RRset at the zone
apex. However, if this option is set to `` no `` , then the KSK bit is
ignored; KSKs are treated as if they were ZSKs and are used to sign
the entire zone. This is similar to the `` dnssec-signzone -z ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
command-line option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
When this option is set to `` yes `` , there must be at least two active
keys for every algorithm represented in the DNSKEY RRset: at least
one KSK and one ZSK per algorithm. If there is any algorithm for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
which this requirement is not met, this option is ignored for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that algorithm.
`` dnssec-dnskey-kskonly ``
When this option and `` update-check-ksk `` are both set to `` yes `` ,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
only key-signing keys (that is, keys with the KSK bit set) are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
used to sign the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS RRsets at the zone apex.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Zone-signing keys (keys without the KSK bit set) are used to sign
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the remainder of the zone, but not the DNSKEY RRset. This is similar
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
to the `` dnssec-signzone -x `` command-line option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` no `` . If `` update-check-ksk `` is set to `` no `` , this
option is ignored.
`` try-tcp-refresh ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` yes `` , try to refresh the zone using TCP if UDP queries fail. The default is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` yes `` .
`` dnssec-secure-to-insecure ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This allows a dynamic zone to transition from secure to insecure (i.e.,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
signed to unsigned) by deleting all of the DNSKEY records. The
default is `` no `` . If set to `` yes `` , and if the DNSKEY RRset at the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone apex is deleted, all RRSIG and NSEC records are removed from
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the zone as well.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the zone uses NSEC3, it is also necessary to delete the
NSEC3PARAM RRset from the zone apex; this causes the removal of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
all corresponding NSEC3 records. (It is expected that this
requirement will be eliminated in a future release.)
Note that if a zone has been configured with `` auto-dnssec maintain ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
and the private keys remain accessible in the key repository,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the zone will be automatically signed again the next time `` named ``
is started.
`` synth-from-dnssec ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option synthesizes answers from cached NSEC, NSEC3, and other RRsets that have been
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
proved to be correct using DNSSEC. The default is `` no `` , but it will become
`` yes `` again in future releases.
.. note :: DNSSEC validation must be enabled for this option to be effective.
This initial implementation only covers synthesis of answers from
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
NSEC records; synthesis from NSEC3 is planned for the future. This
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
will also be controlled by `` synth-from-dnssec `` .
Forwarding
^^^^^^^^^^
The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide cache on
a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external name servers. It
can also be used to allow queries by servers that do not have direct
access to the Internet, but wish to look up exterior names anyway.
Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which the server is not
authoritative and does not have the answer in its cache.
`` forward ``
This option is only meaningful if the forwarders list is not empty. A
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
value of `` first `` is the default and causes the server to query the
forwarders first; if that does not answer the question, the
server then looks for the answer itself. If `` only `` is
specified, the server only queries the forwarders.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` forwarders ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a list of IP addresses to which queries are forwarded. The
default is the empty list (no forwarding). Each address in the list can be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
associated with an optional port number and/or DSCP value, and a default port
number and DSCP value can be set for the entire list.
Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety of ways.
Particular domains can be set to use different forwarders, or have a
different `` forward only/first `` behavior, or not forward at all; see
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
:ref: `zone_statement_grammar` .
.. _dual_stack:
Dual-stack Servers
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort, to work around
problems in reachability due to the lack of support for either IPv4 or IPv6
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
on the host machine.
`` dual-stack-servers ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies host names or addresses of machines with access to both
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used, the server must be
able to resolve the name using only the transport it has. If the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
machine is dual-stacked, the `` dual-stack-servers `` parameter has no
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
effect unless access to a transport has been disabled on the command
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
line (e.g., `` named -4 `` ).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _access_control:
Access Control
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address of the
requesting system. See :ref: `address_match_lists`
for details on how to specify IP address lists.
`` allow-notify ``
This ACL specifies which hosts may send NOTIFY messages to inform
this server of changes to zones for which it is acting as a secondary
server. This is only applicable for secondary zones (i.e., type
`` secondary `` or `` slave `` ).
If this option is set in `` view `` or `` options `` , it is globally
applied to all secondary zones. If set in the `` zone `` statement, the
global value is overridden.
If not specified, the default is to process NOTIFY messages only from
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
the configured `` primaries `` for the zone. `` allow-notify `` can be used
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to expand the list of permitted hosts, not to reduce it.
`` allow-query ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which hosts are allowed to ask ordinary DNS questions.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query `` may also be specified in the `` zone `` statement, in
which case it overrides the `` options allow-query `` statement. If not
specified, the default is to allow queries from all hosts.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
.. note :: `` allow-query-cache `` is used to specify access to the cache.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query-on ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which local addresses can accept ordinary DNS questions.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This makes it possible, for instance, to allow queries on
internal-facing interfaces but disallow them on external-facing ones,
without necessarily knowing the internal network's addresses.
Note that `` allow-query-on `` is only checked for queries that are
permitted by `` allow-query `` . A query must be allowed by both ACLs,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
or it is refused.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query-on `` may also be specified in the `` zone `` statement,
in which case it overrides the `` options allow-query-on `` statement.
If not specified, the default is to allow queries on all addresses.
.. note :: `` allow-query-cache `` is used to specify access to the cache.
`` allow-query-cache ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which hosts are allowed to get answers from the cache. If
`` allow-recursion `` is not set, BIND checks to see if the following parameters
are set, in order: `` allow-query-cache `` and `` allow-query `` (unless `` recursion no; `` is set).
If neither of those parameters is set, the default (localnets; localhost;) is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query-cache-on ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which local addresses can send answers from the cache. If
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query-cache-on `` is not set, then `` allow-recursion-on `` is
used if set. Otherwise, the default is to allow cache responses to be
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
sent from any address. Note: both `` allow-query-cache `` and
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-query-cache-on `` must be satisfied before a cache response
can be sent; a client that is blocked by one cannot be allowed by the
other.
`` allow-recursion ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which hosts are allowed to make recursive queries through
this server. BIND checks to see if the following parameters are set, in
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
order: `` allow-query-cache `` and `` allow-query `` . If neither of those parameters
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is set, the default (localnets; localhost;) is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-recursion-on ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which local addresses can accept recursive queries. If
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-recursion-on `` is not set, then `` allow-query-cache-on `` is
used if set; otherwise, the default is to allow recursive queries on
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
all addresses. Any client permitted to send recursive queries can
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
send them to any address on which `` named `` is listening. Note: both
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-recursion `` and `` allow-recursion-on `` must be satisfied
before recursion is allowed; a client that is blocked by one cannot
be allowed by the other.
`` allow-update ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When set in the `` zone `` statement for a primary zone, this specifies which
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hosts are allowed to submit Dynamic DNS updates to that zone. The
default is to deny updates from all hosts.
Note that allowing updates based on the requestor's IP address is
insecure; see :ref: `dynamic_update_security` for details.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
In general, this option should only be set at the `` zone `` level.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
While a default value can be set at the `` options `` or `` view `` level
and inherited by zones, this could lead to some zones unintentionally
allowing updates.
`` allow-update-forwarding ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When set in the `` zone `` statement for a secondary zone, this specifies which
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hosts are allowed to submit Dynamic DNS updates and have them be
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
forwarded to the primary. The default is `` { none; } `` , which means
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
that no update forwarding is performed.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
To enable update forwarding, specify
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` allow-update-forwarding { any; }; `` in the `` zone `` statement.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Specifying values other than `` { none; } `` or `` { any; } `` is usually
counterproductive; the responsibility for update access control
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
should rest with the primary server, not the secondary.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a secondary server
may expose primary servers to attacks if they rely on insecure
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IP-address-based access control; see :ref: `dynamic_update_security` for more details.
In general this option should only be set at the `` zone `` level.
While a default value can be set at the `` options `` or `` view `` level
and inherited by zones, this can lead to some zones unintentionally
forwarding updates.
`` allow-v6-synthesis ``
This option was introduced for the smooth transition from AAAA to A6
and from "nibble labels" to binary labels. However, since both A6 and
binary labels were then deprecated, this option was also deprecated.
It is now ignored with some warning messages.
.. _allow-transfer-access:
`` allow-transfer ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies which hosts are allowed to receive zone transfers from the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server. `` allow-transfer `` may also be specified in the `` zone ``
statement, in which case it overrides the `` allow-transfer ``
statement set in `` options `` or `` view `` . If not specified, the
default is to allow transfers to all hosts.
`` blackhole ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a list of addresses which the server does not accept queries
from or use to resolve a query. Queries from these addresses are not
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
responded to. The default is `` none `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` keep-response-order ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a list of addresses to which the server sends responses
to TCP queries, in the same order in which they were received. This
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
disables the processing of TCP queries in parallel. The default is
`` none `` .
`` no-case-compress ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a list of addresses which require responses to use
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
case-insensitive compression. This ACL can be used when `` named ``
needs to work with clients that do not comply with the requirement in
:rfc: `1034` to use case-insensitive name comparisons when checking for
matching domain names.
If left undefined, the ACL defaults to `` none `` : case-insensitive
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
compression is used for all clients. If the ACL is defined and
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
matches a client, case is ignored when compressing domain
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
names in DNS responses sent to that client.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This can result in slightly smaller responses; if a response contains
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the names "example.com" and "example.COM", case-insensitive
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
compression treats the second one as a duplicate. It also
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
ensures that the case of the query name exactly matches the case of
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the owner names of returned records, rather than matches the case of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the records entered in the zone file. This allows responses to
exactly match the query, which is required by some clients due to
incorrect use of case-sensitive comparisons.
Case-insensitive compression is *always* used in AXFR and IXFR
responses, regardless of whether the client matches this ACL.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
There are circumstances in which `` named `` does not preserve the case
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of owner names of records: if a zone file defines records of
different types with the same name, but the capitalization of the
name is different (e.g., "www.example.com/A" and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
"WWW.EXAMPLE.COM/AAAA"), then all responses for that name use
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the *first* version of the name that was used in the zone file. This
limitation may be addressed in a future release. However, domain
names specified in the rdata of resource records (i.e., records of
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
type NS, MX, CNAME, etc.) always have their case preserved unless
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the client matches this ACL.
`` resolver-query-timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the amount of time in milliseconds that the resolver spends
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
attempting to resolve a recursive query before failing. The default
and minimum is `` 10000 `` and the maximum is `` 30000 `` . Setting it to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` 0 `` results in the default being used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This value was originally specified in seconds. Values less than or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
equal to 300 are treated as seconds and converted to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
milliseconds before applying the above limits.
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
.. _interfaces:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Interfaces
^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The interfaces and ports that the server answers queries from may be
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
specified using the `` listen-on `` and `` listen-on-v6 `` options.
`` listen-on `` takes an optional port, an optional TLS configuration
identifier, and an `` address_match_list `` of IPv4 addresses. (IPv6
addresses are ignored, with a logged warning.) The server listens on all
interfaces allowed by the address match list. If a TLS configuration is
specified, `` named `` will listen for DNS-over-TLS (DoT) connections, using
the key and certificate specified in the referenced `` tls `` statement. If a
port number is not specified, the default is 53 for standard DNS and 853
for DNS-over-TLS.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Multiple `` listen-on `` statements are allowed. For example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
listen-on port 1234 { !1.2.3.4; 1.2/16; };
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
listen-on port 8853 tls example-tls { 4.3.2.1; };
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
enables the name server to listen for standard DNS queries on port 53 of the
IP address 5.6.7.8 and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net 1.2
that is not 1.2.3.4, and to listen for DNS-over-TLS connections on port
8853 of the IP address 4.3.2.1.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
If no `` listen-on `` is specified, the server listens for standard DNS
on port 53 of all IPv4 interfaces.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
The `` listen-on-v6 `` option is used to specify the interfaces and the ports
on which the server listens for incoming queries sent using IPv6. If not
specified, the server listens for standard DNS queries on port 53 of all
IPv6 interfaces.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Multiple `` listen-on-v6 `` options can be used. For example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
listen-on-v6 { any; };
listen-on-v6 port 1234 { !2001:db8::/32; any; };
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
listen-on port 8853 tls example-tls { 2001:db8::100; };
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-16 12:21:32 -07:00
enables the name server to listen for standard DNS queries on port 53 of
any IPv6 addresses and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that are not in the
prefix 2001:db8::/32, and for DNS-over-TLS connections on port 8853 of
the address 2001:db8::100.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
To instruct the server not to listen on any IPv6 address, use:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
listen-on-v6 { none; };
.. _query_address:
Query Address
^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the server does not know the answer to a question, it queries other
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name servers. `` query-source `` specifies the address and port used for
such queries. For queries sent over IPv6, there is a separate
`` query-source-v6 `` option. If `` address `` is `` * `` (asterisk) or is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
omitted, a wildcard IP address (`` INADDR_ANY `` ) is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If `` port `` is `` * `` or is omitted, a random port number from a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
pre-configured range is picked up and used for each query. The
port range(s) is specified in the `` use-v4-udp-ports `` (for IPv4)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and `` use-v6-udp-ports `` (for IPv6) options, excluding the ranges
specified in the `` avoid-v4-udp-ports `` and `` avoid-v6-udp-ports ``
options, respectively.
The defaults of the `` query-source `` and `` query-source-v6 `` options
are:
::
query-source address * port * ;
query-source-v6 address * port * ;
If `` use-v4-udp-ports `` or `` use-v6-udp-ports `` is unspecified,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` checks whether the operating system provides a programming
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
interface to retrieve the system's default range for ephemeral ports. If
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
such an interface is available, `` named `` uses the corresponding
system default range; otherwise, it uses its own defaults:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
use-v4-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
use-v6-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
.. note :: Make sure the ranges are sufficiently large for security. A
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
desirable size depends on several parameters, but we generally recommend
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
it contain at least 16384 ports (14 bits of entropy). Note also that the
system's default range when used may be too small for this purpose, and
that the range may even be changed while `` named `` is running; the new
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
range is automatically applied when `` named `` is reloaded. Explicit
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
configuration of `` use-v4-udp-ports `` and `` use-v6-udp-ports `` is encouraged,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
so that the ranges are sufficiently large and are reasonably
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
independent from the ranges used by other applications.
.. note :: The operational configuration where `` named `` runs may prohibit
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the use of some ports. For example, Unix systems do not allow
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` named `` , if run without root privilege, to use ports less than 1024.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If such ports are included in the specified (or detected) set of query
ports, the corresponding query attempts will fail, resulting in
resolution failures or delay. It is therefore important to configure the
set of ports that can be safely used in the expected operational
environment.
The defaults of the `` avoid-v4-udp-ports `` and `` avoid-v6-udp-ports ``
options are:
::
avoid-v4-udp-ports {};
avoid-v6-udp-ports {};
.. note :: BIND 9.5.0 introduced the `` use-queryport-pool `` option to support
a pool of such random ports, but this option is now obsolete because
reusing the same ports in the pool may not be sufficiently secure. For
the same reason, it is generally strongly discouraged to specify a
particular port for the `` query-source `` or `` query-source-v6 `` options;
it implicitly disables the use of randomized port numbers.
`` use-queryport-pool ``
This option is obsolete.
`` queryport-pool-ports ``
This option is obsolete.
`` queryport-pool-updateinterval ``
This option is obsolete.
.. note :: The address specified in the `` query-source `` option is used for both
UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only to UDP queries. TCP
queries always use a random unprivileged port.
.. note :: Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source address
for TCP sockets.
.. note :: See also `` transfer-source `` and `` notify-source `` .
.. _zone_transfers:
Zone Transfers
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
BIND has mechanisms in place to facilitate zone transfers and set limits
on the amount of load that transfers place on the system. The following
options apply to zone transfers.
`` also-notify ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers that are also
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of the zone is loaded, in
addition to the servers listed in the zone's NS records. This helps
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to ensure that copies of the zones quickly converge on stealth
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
servers. Optionally, a port may be specified with each
`` also-notify `` address to send the notify messages to a port other
than the default of 53. An optional TSIG key can also be specified
with each address to cause the notify messages to be signed; this can
be useful when sending notifies to multiple views. In place of
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
explicit addresses, one or more named `` primaries `` lists can be used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If an `` also-notify `` list is given in a `` zone `` statement, it
overrides the `` options also-notify `` statement. When a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` zone notify `` statement is set to `` no `` , the IP addresses in the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
global `` also-notify `` list are not sent NOTIFY messages for that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
zone. The default is the empty list (no global notification list).
`` max-transfer-time-in ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Inbound zone transfers running longer than this many minutes are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
terminated. The default is 120 minutes (2 hours). The maximum value
is 28 days (40320 minutes).
`` max-transfer-idle-in ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Inbound zone transfers making no progress in this many minutes are
terminated. The default is 60 minutes (1 hour). The maximum value
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is 28 days (40320 minutes).
`` max-transfer-time-out ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Outbound zone transfers running longer than this many minutes are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
terminated. The default is 120 minutes (2 hours). The maximum value
is 28 days (40320 minutes).
`` max-transfer-idle-out ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Outbound zone transfers making no progress in this many minutes are
terminated. The default is 60 minutes (1 hour). The maximum value
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is 28 days (40320 minutes).
`` notify-rate ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the rate at which NOTIFY requests are sent during normal zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
maintenance operations. (NOTIFY requests due to initial zone loading
are subject to a separate rate limit; see below.) The default is 20
per second. The lowest possible rate is one per second; when set to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zero, it is silently raised to one.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` startup-notify-rate ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the rate at which NOTIFY requests are sent when the name server
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is first starting up, or when zones have been newly added to the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
name server. The default is 20 per second. The lowest possible rate is
one per second; when set to zero, it is silently raised to one.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` serial-query-rate ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Secondary servers periodically query primary servers to find out if
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
zone serial numbers have changed. Each such query uses a minute
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
amount of the secondary server's network bandwidth. To limit the amount
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the rate at which queries are sent.
The value of the `` serial-query-rate `` option, an integer, is the
maximum number of queries sent per second. The default is 20 per
second. The lowest possible rate is one per second; when set to zero,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
it is silently raised to one.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` transfer-format ``
Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
`` one-answer `` and `` many-answers `` . The `` transfer-format `` option
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
is used on the primary server to determine which format it sends.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` one-answer `` uses one DNS message per resource record transferred.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` many-answers `` packs as many resource records as possible into one
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
message. `` many-answers `` is more efficient; the default is `` many-answers `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` transfer-format `` may be overridden on a per-server basis by using
the `` server `` statement.
`` transfer-message-size ``
This is an upper bound on the uncompressed size of DNS messages used
in zone transfers over TCP. If a message grows larger than this size,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
additional messages are used to complete the zone transfer.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(Note, however, that this is a hint, not a hard limit; if a message
contains a single resource record whose RDATA does not fit within the
size limit, a larger message will be permitted so the record can be
transferred.)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Valid values are between 512 and 65535 octets; any values outside
that range are adjusted to the nearest value within it. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` 20480 `` , which was selected to improve message
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
compression; most DNS messages of this size will compress to less
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
than 16536 bytes. Larger messages cannot be compressed as
effectively, because 16536 is the largest permissible compression
offset pointer in a DNS message.
This option is mainly intended for server testing; there is rarely
any benefit in setting a value other than the default.
`` transfers-in ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This is the maximum number of inbound zone transfers that can run
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
concurrently. The default value is `` 10 `` . Increasing
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
`` transfers-in `` may speed up the convergence of secondary zones, but it
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
also may increase the load on the local system.
`` transfers-out ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This is the maximum number of outbound zone transfers that can run
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
concurrently. Zone transfer requests in excess of the limit are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
refused. The default value is `` 10 `` .
`` transfers-per-ns ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This is the maximum number of inbound zone transfers that can concurrently
transfer from a given remote name server. The default value is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` 2 `` . Increasing `` transfers-per-ns `` may speed up the convergence
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
of secondary zones, but it also may increase the load on the remote name
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server. `` transfers-per-ns `` may be overridden on a per-server basis
by using the `` transfers `` phrase of the `` server `` statement.
`` transfer-source ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` transfer-source `` determines which local address is bound to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IPv4 TCP connections used to fetch zones transferred inbound by the
server. It also determines the source IPv4 address, and optionally
the UDP port, used for the refresh queries and forwarded dynamic
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
updates. If not set, it defaults to a system-controlled value which
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is usually the address of the interface "closest to" the remote
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
end. This address must appear in the remote end's `` allow-transfer ``
option for the zone being transferred, if one is specified. This
statement sets the `` transfer-source `` for all zones, but can be
overridden on a per-view or per-zone basis by including a
`` transfer-source `` statement within the `` view `` or `` zone `` block
in the configuration file.
.. note :: Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source
address for TCP sockets.
`` transfer-source-v6 ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option is the same as `` transfer-source `` , except zone transfers are performed
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
using IPv6.
`` alt-transfer-source ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This indicates an alternate transfer source if the one listed in `` transfer-source ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
fails and `` use-alt-transfer-source `` is set.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
.. note :: To avoid using the alternate transfer source,
set `` use-alt-transfer-source `` appropriately and
do not depend upon getting an answer back to the first refresh
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
query.
`` alt-transfer-source-v6 ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This indicates an alternate transfer source if the one listed in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` transfer-source-v6 `` fails and `` use-alt-transfer-source `` is set.
`` use-alt-transfer-source ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This indicates whether the alternate transfer sources should be used. If views are specified,
this defaults to `` no `` ; otherwise, it defaults to `` yes `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` notify-source ``
`` notify-source `` determines which local source address, and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
optionally UDP port, is used to send NOTIFY messages. This
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
address must appear in the secondary server's `` primaries `` zone clause or
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
in an `` allow-notify `` clause. This statement sets the
`` notify-source `` for all zones, but can be overridden on a per-zone
or per-view basis by including a `` notify-source `` statement within
the `` zone `` or `` view `` block in the configuration file.
.. note :: Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source
address for TCP sockets.
`` notify-source-v6 ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option acts like `` notify-source `` , but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
addresses.
.. _port_lists:
UDP Port Lists
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
`` use-v4-udp-ports `` , `` avoid-v4-udp-ports `` , `` use-v6-udp-ports `` , and
`` avoid-v6-udp-ports `` specify a list of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are or are not used as source ports for UDP messages. See
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
:ref: `query_address` about how the available ports are
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
determined. For example, with the following configuration:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
use-v6-udp-ports { range 32768 65535; };
avoid-v6-udp-ports { 40000; range 50000 60000; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
UDP ports of IPv6 messages sent from `` named `` are in one of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
following ranges: 32768 to 39999, 40001 to 49999, and 60001 to 65535.
`` avoid-v4-udp-ports `` and `` avoid-v6-udp-ports `` can be used to prevent
`` named `` from choosing as its random source port a port that is blocked
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
by a firewall or a port that is used by other applications; if a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
query went out with a source port blocked by a firewall, the answer
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
would not pass through the firewall and the name server would have to query
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
again. Note: the desired range can also be represented only with
`` use-v4-udp-ports `` and `` use-v6-udp-ports `` , and the `` avoid- ``
options are redundant in that sense; they are provided for backward
compatibility and to possibly simplify the port specification.
.. _resource_limits:
Operating System Resource Limits
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The server's usage of many system resources can be limited. Scaled
values are allowed when specifying resource limits. For example, `` 1G ``
can be used instead of `` 1073741824 `` to specify a limit of one
gigabyte. `` unlimited `` requests unlimited use, or the maximum available
amount. `` default `` uses the limit that was in force when the server was
started. See the description of `` size_spec `` in :ref: `configuration_file_elements` .
The following options set operating system resource limits for the name
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
server process. Some operating systems do not support some or any of the
limits; on such systems, a warning is issued if an unsupported
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
limit is used.
`` coresize ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum size of a core dump. The default is `` default `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` datasize ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum amount of data memory the server may use. The default is
`` default `` . This is a hard limit on server memory usage; if the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this limit, the
allocation will fail, which may in turn leave the server unable to
perform DNS service. Therefore, this option is rarely useful as a way
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to limit the amount of memory used by the server, but it can be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
used to raise an operating system data size limit that is too small
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
by default. To limit the amount of memory used by the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
server, use the `` max-cache-size `` and `` recursive-clients `` options
instead.
`` files ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of files the server may have open concurrently.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` unlimited `` .
`` stacksize ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum amount of stack memory the server may use. The default is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` default `` .
.. _server_resource_limits:
Server Resource Limits
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The following options set limits on the server's resource consumption
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
that are enforced internally by the server rather than by the operating
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
system.
`` max-journal-size ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets a maximum size for each journal file (see :ref: `journal` ),
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
expressed in bytes or, if followed by an
optional unit suffix ('k', 'm', or 'g'), in kilobytes, megabytes, or
gigabytes. When the journal file approaches the specified size, some
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
of the oldest transactions in the journal are automatically
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
removed. The largest permitted value is 2 gigabytes. Very small
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
values are rounded up to 4096 bytes. It is possible to specify `` unlimited `` ,
which also means 2 gigabytes. If the limit is set to `` default `` or
left unset, the journal is allowed to grow up to twice as large
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
as the zone. (There is little benefit in storing larger journals.)
This option may also be set on a per-zone basis.
`` max-records ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of records permitted in a zone. The default is
zero, which means the maximum is unlimited.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` recursive-clients ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number (a "hard quota") of simultaneous recursive lookups
the server performs on behalf of clients. The default is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` 1000 `` . Because each recursing client uses a fair bit of memory (on
the order of 20 kilobytes), the value of the `` recursive-clients ``
option may have to be decreased on hosts with limited memory.
`` recursive-clients `` defines a "hard quota" limit for pending
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
recursive clients; when more clients than this are pending, new
incoming requests are not accepted, and for each incoming request
a previous pending request is dropped.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
A "soft quota" is also set. When this lower quota is exceeded,
incoming requests are accepted, but for each one, a pending request
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is dropped. If `` recursive-clients `` is greater than 1000, the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
soft quota is set to `` recursive-clients `` minus 100; otherwise it is
set to 90% of `` recursive-clients `` .
`` tcp-clients ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the maximum number of simultaneous client TCP connections that the
server accepts. The default is `` 150 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _clients-per-query:
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` clients-per-query `` ; `` max-clients-per-query ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
These set the initial value (minimum) and maximum number of recursive
simultaneous clients for any given query (<qname,qtype,qclass>) that
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the server accepts before dropping additional clients. `` named ``
attempts to self-tune this value and changes are logged. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default values are 10 and 100.
This value should reflect how many queries come in for a given name
in the time it takes to resolve that name. If the number of queries
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
exceeds this value, `` named `` assumes that it is dealing with a
non-responsive zone and drops additional queries. If it gets a
response after dropping queries, it raises the estimate. The
estimate is then lowered in 20 minutes if it has remained
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
unchanged.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` clients-per-query `` is set to zero, there is no limit on
the number of clients per query and no queries are dropped.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If `` max-clients-per-query `` is set to zero, there is no upper
bound other than that imposed by `` recursive-clients `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` fetches-per-zone ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of simultaneous iterative queries to any one
domain that the server permits before blocking new queries for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
data in or beneath that zone. This value should reflect how many
fetches would normally be sent to any one zone in the time it would
take to resolve them. It should be smaller than
`` recursive-clients `` .
When many clients simultaneously query for the same name and type,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the clients are all attached to the same fetch, up to the
`` max-clients-per-query `` limit, and only one iterative query is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sent. However, when clients are simultaneously querying for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
*different* names or types, multiple queries are sent and
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` max-clients-per-query `` is not effective as a limit.
Optionally, this value may be followed by the keyword `` drop `` or
`` fail `` , indicating whether queries which exceed the fetch quota for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
a zone are dropped with no response, or answered with SERVFAIL.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` drop `` .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` fetches-per-zone `` is set to zero, there is no limit on the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
number of fetches per query and no queries are dropped. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is zero.
The current list of active fetches can be dumped by running
`` rndc recursing `` . The list includes the number of active fetches
for each domain and the number of queries that have been passed or
dropped as a result of the `` fetches-per-zone `` limit. (Note: these
counters are not cumulative over time; whenever the number of active
fetches for a domain drops to zero, the counter for that domain is
deleted, and the next time a fetch is sent to that domain, it is
recreated with the counters set to zero.)
`` fetches-per-server ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of simultaneous iterative queries that the server
allows to be sent to a single upstream name server before
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
blocking additional queries. This value should reflect how many
fetches would normally be sent to any one server in the time it would
take to resolve them. It should be smaller than
`` recursive-clients `` .
Optionally, this value may be followed by the keyword `` drop `` or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` fail `` , indicating whether queries are dropped with no
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
response or answered with SERVFAIL, when all of the servers
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
authoritative for a zone are found to have exceeded the per-server
quota. The default is `` fail `` .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
If `` fetches-per-server `` is set to zero, there is no limit on
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the number of fetches per query and no queries are dropped. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is zero.
The `` fetches-per-server `` quota is dynamically adjusted in response
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to detected congestion. As queries are sent to a server and either are
answered or time out, an exponentially weighted moving average
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is calculated of the ratio of timeouts to responses. If the current
average timeout ratio rises above a "high" threshold, then
`` fetches-per-server `` is reduced for that server. If the timeout
ratio drops below a "low" threshold, then `` fetches-per-server `` is
increased. The `` fetch-quota-params `` options can be used to adjust
the parameters for this calculation.
`` fetch-quota-params ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the parameters to use for dynamic resizing of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` fetches-per-server `` quota in response to detected congestion.
The first argument is an integer value indicating how frequently to
recalculate the moving average of the ratio of timeouts to responses
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for each server. The default is 100, meaning that BIND recalculates the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
average ratio after every 100 queries have either been answered or
timed out.
The remaining three arguments represent the "low" threshold
(defaulting to a timeout ratio of 0.1), the "high" threshold
(defaulting to a timeout ratio of 0.3), and the discount rate for the
moving average (defaulting to 0.7). A higher discount rate causes
recent events to weigh more heavily when calculating the moving
average; a lower discount rate causes past events to weigh more
heavily, smoothing out short-term blips in the timeout ratio. These
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
arguments are all fixed-point numbers with precision of 1/100; at
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
most two places after the decimal point are significant.
`` reserved-sockets ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the number of file descriptors reserved for TCP, stdio, etc. This
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
needs to be big enough to cover the number of interfaces `` named ``
listens on plus `` tcp-clients `` , as well as to provide room for
outgoing TCP queries and incoming zone transfers. The default is
`` 512 `` . The minimum value is `` 128 `` and the maximum value is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` 128 `` fewer than maxsockets (-S). This option may be removed in the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
future.
This option has little effect on Windows.
`` max-cache-size ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum amount of memory to use for the server's cache, in bytes
or percentage of total physical memory. When the amount of data in the cache
reaches this limit, the server causes records to expire
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
prematurely, following an LRU-based strategy, so that the limit is not
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
exceeded. The keyword `` unlimited `` , or the value 0, places no
limit on the cache size; records are purged from the cache only when
their TTLs expire. Any positive values less than 2MB are ignored
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and reset to 2MB. In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
separately to the cache of each view. The default is `` 90% `` . On
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
systems where detection of the amount of physical memory is not supported,
values represented as a percentage fall back to unlimited. Note that the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
detection of physical memory is done only once at startup, so
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` does not adjust the cache size if the amount of physical
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
memory is changed during runtime.
`` tcp-listen-queue ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This sets the listen-queue depth. The default and minimum is 10. If the kernel
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
supports the accept filter "dataready", this also controls how many
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
TCP connections are queued in kernel space waiting for some
data before being passed to accept. Non-zero values less than 10 are
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
silently raised. A value of 0 may also be used; on most platforms
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
this sets the listen-queue length to a system-defined default value.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` tcp-initial-timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the amount of time (in units of 100 milliseconds) that the server waits on
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
a new TCP connection for the first message from the client. The
default is 300 (30 seconds), the minimum is 25 (2.5 seconds), and the
maximum is 1200 (two minutes). Values above the maximum or below the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
minimum are adjusted with a logged warning. (Note: this value
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
must be greater than the expected round-trip delay time; otherwise, no
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
client will ever have enough time to submit a message.) This value
can be updated at runtime by using `` rndc tcp-timeouts `` .
`` tcp-idle-timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the amount of time (in units of 100 milliseconds) that the server waits on
an idle TCP connection before closing it, when the client is not using
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the EDNS TCP keepalive option. The default is 300 (30 seconds), the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
maximum is 1200 (two minutes), and the minimum is 1 (one-tenth of a
second). Values above the maximum or below the minimum are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
adjusted with a logged warning. See `` tcp-keepalive-timeout `` for
clients using the EDNS TCP keepalive option. This value can be
updated at runtime by using `` rndc tcp-timeouts `` .
`` tcp-keepalive-timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the amount of time (in units of 100 milliseconds) that the server waits on
an idle TCP connection before closing it, when the client is using the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
EDNS TCP keepalive option. The default is 300 (30 seconds), the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
maximum is 65535 (about 1.8 hours), and the minimum is 1 (one-tenth
of a second). Values above the maximum or below the minimum are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
adjusted with a logged warning. This value may be greater than
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` tcp-idle-timeout `` because clients using the EDNS TCP keepalive
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option are expected to use TCP connections for more than one message.
This value can be updated at runtime by using `` rndc tcp-timeouts `` .
`` tcp-advertised-timeout ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the timeout value (in units of 100 milliseconds) that the server sends
in responses containing the EDNS TCP keepalive option, which informs a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
client of the amount of time it may keep the session open. The
default is 300 (30 seconds), the maximum is 65535 (about 1.8 hours),
and the minimum is 0, which signals that the clients must close TCP
connections immediately. Ordinarily this should be set to the same
value as `` tcp-keepalive-timeout `` . This value can be updated at
runtime by using `` rndc tcp-timeouts `` .
.. _intervals:
Periodic Task Intervals
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
`` cleaning-interval ``
This option is obsolete.
`` heartbeat-interval ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The server performs zone maintenance tasks for all zones marked
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
as `` dialup `` whenever this interval expires. The default is 60
minutes. Reasonable values are up to 1 day (1440 minutes). The
maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes). If set to 0, no zone
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
maintenance for these zones occurs.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` interface-interval ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The server scans the network interface list every `` interface-interval ``
minutes. The default is 60 minutes; the maximum value is 28 days (40320
minutes). If set to 0, interface scanning only occurs when the configuration
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
file is loaded, or when `` automatic-interface-scan `` is enabled and supported
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
by the operating system. After the scan, the server begins listening for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
queries on any newly discovered interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` listen-on `` configuration), and stops listening on interfaces that have
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
gone away. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
.. _the_sortlist_statement:
The `` sortlist `` Statement
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource records
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(RRs) forming a resource record set (RRset). The name server
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
normally returns the RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order (but
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
see the `` rrset-order `` statement in :ref: `rrset_ordering` ). The client resolver code should
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
rearrange the RRs as appropriate: that is, using any addresses on the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
local net in preference to other addresses. However, not all resolvers
can do this or are correctly configured. When a client is using a local
server, the sorting can be performed in the server, based on the
client's address. This only requires configuring the name servers, not
all the clients.
The `` sortlist `` statement (see below) takes an `` address_match_list `` and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
interprets it in a special way. Each top-level statement in the `` sortlist ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
must itself be an explicit `` address_match_list `` with one or two elements. The
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
first element (which may be an IP address, an IP prefix, an ACL name, or a nested
`` address_match_list `` ) of each top-level list is checked against the source
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
address of the query until a match is found. When the addresses in the first
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
element overlap, the first rule to match is selected.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Once the source address of the query has been matched, if the top-level
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
statement contains only one element, the actual primitive element that
matched the source address is used to select the address in the response
to move to the beginning of the response. If the statement is a list of
two elements, then the second element is interpreted as a topology
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
preference list. Each top-level element is assigned a distance, and the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
address in the response with the minimum distance is moved to the
beginning of the response.
In the following example, any queries received from any of the addresses
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
of the host itself get responses preferring addresses on any of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
locally connected networks. Next most preferred are addresses on the
192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the 192.168.2/24 or
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
192.168.3/24 network, with no preference shown between these two
networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.1/24 network
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24 and
192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.4/24
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
or the 192.168.5/24 network only prefer other addresses on their
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
directly connected networks.
::
sortlist {
// IF the local host
// THEN first fit on the following nets
{ localhost;
{ localnets;
192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.1 THEN use .1, or .2 or .3
{ 192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.2 THEN use .2, or .1 or .3
{ 192.168.2/24;
{ 192.168.2/24;
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.3 THEN use .3, or .1 or .2
{ 192.168.3/24;
{ 192.168.3/24;
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
// IF .4 or .5 THEN prefer that net
{ { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; };
};
};
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The following example illlustrates reasonable behavior for the local host
and hosts on directly connected networks. Responses sent to queries from the
local host favor any of the directly connected networks. Responses
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sent to queries from any other hosts on a directly connected network
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
prefer addresses on that same network. Responses to other queries
are not sorted.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
sortlist {
{ localhost; localnets; };
{ localnets; };
};
.. _rrset_ordering:
RRset Ordering
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
.. note ::
While alternating the order of records in a DNS response between
subsequent queries is a known load distribution technique, certain
caveats apply (mostly stemming from caching) which usually make it a
suboptimal choice for load balancing purposes when used on its own.
The `` rrset-order `` statement permits configuration of the ordering of
the records in a multiple-record response. See also:
:ref: `the_sortlist_statement` .
Each rule in an `` rrset-order `` statement is defined as follows:
::
[class <class_name>] [type <type_name>] [name "<domain_name>"] order <ordering>
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
The default qualifiers for each rule are:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
- If no `` class `` is specified, the default is `` ANY `` .
- If no `` type `` is specified, the default is `` ANY `` .
- If no `` name `` is specified, the default is `` * `` (asterisk).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
`` <domain_name> `` only matches the name itself, not any of its
subdomains. To make a rule match all subdomains of a given name, a
wildcard name (`` *.<domain_name> `` ) must be used. Note that
`` *.<domain_name> `` does *not* match `` <domain_name> `` itself; to
specify RRset ordering for a name and all of its subdomains, two
separate rules must be defined: one for `` <domain_name> `` and one for
`` *.<domain_name> `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-12 13:19:50 +02:00
The legal values for `` <ordering> `` are:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` fixed ``
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
Records are returned in the order they are defined in the zone file.
.. note ::
The `` fixed `` option is only available if BIND is configured with
`` --enable-fixed-rrset `` at compile time.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` random ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Records are returned in a random order.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` cyclic ``
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
Records are returned in a cyclic round-robin order, rotating by one
record per query.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` none ``
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
Records are returned in the order they were retrieved from the
database. This order is indeterminate, but remains consistent as
long as the database is not modified.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
The default RRset order used depends on whether any `` rrset-order ``
statements are present in the configuration file used by `` named `` :
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
- If no `` rrset-order `` statement is present in the configuration
file, the implicit default is to return all records in `` random ``
order.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
- If any `` rrset-order `` statements are present in the configuration
file, but no ordering rule specified in these statements matches a
given RRset, the default order for that RRset is `` none `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
Note that if multiple `` rrset-order `` statements are present in the
configuration file (at both the `` options `` and `` view `` levels), they
are *not* combined; instead, the more-specific one (`` view `` ) replaces
the less-specific one (`` options `` ).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
If multiple rules within a single `` rrset-order `` statement match a
given RRset, the first matching rule is applied.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
Example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
::
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-10-02 08:41:43 +02:00
rrset-order {
type A name "foo.isc.org" order random;
type AAAA name "foo.isc.org" order cyclic;
name "bar.isc.org" order fixed;
name "*.bar.isc.org" order random;
name "*.baz.isc.org" order cyclic;
};
With the above configuration, the following RRset ordering is used:
=================== ======== ===========
QNAME QTYPE RRset Order
=================== ======== ===========
`` foo.isc.org `` `` A `` `` random ``
`` foo.isc.org `` `` AAAA `` `` cyclic ``
`` foo.isc.org `` `` TXT `` `` none ``
`` sub.foo.isc.org `` all `` none ``
`` bar.isc.org `` all `` fixed ``
`` sub.bar.isc.org `` all `` random ``
`` baz.isc.org `` all `` none ``
`` sub.baz.isc.org `` all `` cyclic ``
=================== ======== ===========
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _tuning:
Tuning
^^^^^^
`` lame-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the number of seconds to cache a lame server indication. 0
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
disables caching. (This is **NOT** recommended.) The default is
`` 600 `` (10 minutes) and the maximum value is `` 1800 `` (30 minutes).
`` servfail-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the number of seconds to cache a SERVFAIL response due to DNSSEC
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
validation failure or other general server failure. If set to `` 0 `` ,
SERVFAIL caching is disabled. The SERVFAIL cache is not consulted if
a query has the CD (Checking Disabled) bit set; this allows a query
that failed due to DNSSEC validation to be retried without waiting
for the SERVFAIL TTL to expire.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The maximum value is `` 30 `` seconds; any higher value is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
silently reduced. The default is `` 1 `` second.
`` min-ncache-ttl ``
To reduce network traffic and increase performance, the server stores
negative answers. `` min-ncache-ttl `` is used to set a minimum
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
retention time for these answers in the server, in seconds. For
convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used to specify the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The default `` min-ncache-ttl `` is `` 0 `` seconds. `` min-ncache-ttl `` cannot
exceed 90 seconds and is truncated to 90 seconds if set to a greater
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
value.
`` min-cache-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the minimum time for which the server caches ordinary (positive)
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
answers, in seconds. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
The default `` min-cache-ttl `` is `` 0 `` seconds. `` min-cache-ttl `` cannot
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
exceed 90 seconds and is truncated to 90 seconds if set to a greater
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
value.
`` max-ncache-ttl ``
To reduce network traffic and increase performance, the server stores
negative answers. `` max-ncache-ttl `` is used to set a maximum retention time
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
for these answers in the server, in seconds. For convenience, TTL-style
time-unit suffixes may be used to specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
duration formats.
The default `` max-ncache-ttl `` is 10800 seconds (3 hours). `` max-ncache-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
cannot exceed 7 days and is silently truncated to 7 days if set to a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
greater value.
`` max-cache-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum time for which the server caches ordinary (positive)
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
answers, in seconds. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
The default `` max-cache-ttl `` is 604800 (one week). A value of zero may cause
all queries to return SERVFAIL, because of lost caches of intermediate RRsets
(such as NS and glue AAAA/A records) in the resolution process.
`` max-stale-ttl ``
2020-07-21 10:38:55 +02:00
If retaining stale RRsets in cache is enabled, and returning of stale cached
answers is also enabled, `` max-stale-ttl `` sets the maximum time
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for which the server retains records past their normal expiry to
return them as stale records, when the servers for those records are
2020-05-27 17:48:39 +02:00
not reachable. The default is 12 hours. The minimum allowed is 1
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
second; a value of 0 is updated silently to 1 second.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-21 10:38:55 +02:00
For stale answers to be returned, the retaining of them in cache must be
enabled via the configuration option `` stale-cache-enable `` , and returning
cached answers must be enabled, either in the configuration file using the
`` stale-answer-enable `` option or by calling `` rndc serve-stale on `` .
When `` stale-cache-enable `` is set to `` no `` , setting the `` max-stale-ttl ``
has no effect, the value of `` max-cache-ttl `` will be `` 0 `` in such case.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` resolver-nonbackoff-tries ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies how many retries occur before exponential backoff kicks in. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` 3 `` .
`` resolver-retry-interval ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the base retry interval in milliseconds. The default is `` 800 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` sig-validity-interval ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This specifies the number of days into the future that DNSSEC signatures
that are automatically generated as a result of dynamic updates
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(:ref: `dynamic_update` ) will expire. There is an optional second
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
field which specifies how long before expiry the signatures are
regenerated. If not specified, the signatures are regenerated
at 1/4 of the base interval. The second field is specified in days if the
base interval is greater than 7 days; otherwise it is specified in
hours. The default base interval is `` 30 `` days, giving a re-signing
interval of 7 1/2 days. The maximum value is 10 years (3660 days).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The signature inception time is unconditionally set to one hour
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
before the current time, to allow for a limited amount of clock skew.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` sig-validity-interval `` can be overridden for DNSKEY records by
setting `` dnskey-sig-validity `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` sig-validity-interval `` should be at least several multiples
of the SOA expire interval, to allow for reasonable interaction
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
between the various timer and expiry dates.
`` dnskey-sig-validity ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the number of days into the future when DNSSEC signatures
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that are automatically generated for DNSKEY RRsets as a result of
dynamic updates (:ref: `dynamic_update` ) will expire.
If set to a non-zero value, this overrides the value set by
`` sig-validity-interval `` . The default is zero, meaning
`` sig-validity-interval `` is used. The maximum value is 3660 days (10
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
years), and higher values are rejected.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` sig-signing-nodes ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This specifies the maximum number of nodes to be examined in each quantum,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
when signing a zone with a new DNSKEY. The default is `` 100 `` .
`` sig-signing-signatures ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a threshold number of signatures that terminates
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
processing a quantum, when signing a zone with a new DNSKEY. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` 10 `` .
`` sig-signing-type ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This specifies a private RDATA type to be used when generating signing-state
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
records. The default is `` 65534 `` .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This parameter may be removed in a future version,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
once there is a standard type.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Signing-state records are used internally by `` named `` to track
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the current state of a zone-signing process, i.e., whether it is
still active or has been completed. The records can be inspected
using the command `` rndc signing -list zone `` . Once `` named `` has
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
finished signing a zone with a particular key, the signing-state
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
record associated with that key can be removed from the zone by
running `` rndc signing -clear keyid/algorithm zone `` . To clear all of
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the completed signing-state records for a zone, use
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` rndc signing -clear all zone `` .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` min-refresh-time `` ; `` max-refresh-time `` ; `` min-retry-time `` ; `` max-retry-time ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a zone
(querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers. Usually the
SOA values for the zone are used, up to a hard-coded maximum expiry
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
of 24 weeks. However, these values are set by the primary, giving
secondary server administrators little control over their contents.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and maximum
refresh and retry time in seconds per-zone, per-view, or globally.
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
These options are valid for secondary and stub zones, and clamp the SOA
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
refresh and retry times to the specified values.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The following defaults apply: `` min-refresh-time `` 300 seconds,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` max-refresh-time `` 2419200 seconds (4 weeks), `` min-retry-time ``
500 seconds, and `` max-retry-time `` 1209600 seconds (2 weeks).
`` edns-udp-size ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This sets the maximum advertised EDNS UDP buffer size, in bytes, to control
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the size of packets received from authoritative servers in response
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to recursive queries. Valid values are 512 to 4096; values outside
this range are silently adjusted to the nearest value within it.
2020-09-23 14:47:26 +02:00
The default value is 1232.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The usual reason for setting `` edns-udp-size `` to a non-default value
is to get UDP answers to pass through broken firewalls that block
fragmented packets and/or block UDP DNS packets that are greater than
512 bytes.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When `` named `` first queries a remote server, it advertises a UDP
2020-09-23 14:47:26 +02:00
buffer size of 1232.
Query timeouts observed for any given server affect the buffer size
advertised in queries sent to that server. Depending on observed packet
dropping patterns, the query is retried over TCP. Per-server EDNS statistics
are only retained in memory for the lifetime of a given server's ADB entry.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-09-30 18:38:32 +02:00
The `` named `` now sets the DON'T FRAGMENT flag on outgoing UDP packets.
According to the measurements done by multiple parties this should not be
causing any operational problems as most of the Internet "core" is able to
cope with IP message sizes between 1400-1500 bytes, the 1232 size was picked
as a conservative minimal number that could be changed by the DNS operator to
a estimated path MTU minus the estimated header space. In practice, the
smallest MTU witnessed in the operational DNS community is 1500 octets, the
Ethernet maximum payload size, so a a useful default for maximum DNS/UDP
payload size on **reliable** networks would be 1400.
2020-05-25 14:34:56 +02:00
Any server-specific `` edns-udp-size `` setting has precedence over all
the above rules.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` max-udp-size ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This sets the maximum EDNS UDP message size that `` named `` sends, in bytes.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Valid values are 512 to 4096; values outside this range are
silently adjusted to the nearest value within it. The default value
2020-09-23 14:47:26 +02:00
is 1232.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This value applies to responses sent by a server; to set the
advertised buffer size in queries, see `` edns-udp-size `` .
The usual reason for setting `` max-udp-size `` to a non-default value
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
is to allow UDP answers to pass through broken firewalls that block
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
fragmented packets and/or block UDP packets that are greater than 512
bytes. This is independent of the advertised receive buffer
(`` edns-udp-size `` ).
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Setting this to a low value encourages additional TCP traffic to
the name server.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` masterfile-format ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the file format of zone files (see :ref: `zonefile_format` ).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default value is `` text `` , which
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
is the standard textual representation, except for secondary zones, in
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
which the default value is `` raw `` . Files in formats other than
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` text `` are typically expected to be generated by the
`` named-compilezone `` tool, or dumped by `` named `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Note that when a zone file in a format other than `` text `` is
loaded, `` named `` may omit some of the checks which are
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
performed for a file in `` text `` format. In particular,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` check-names `` checks do not apply for the `` raw `` format. This
means a zone file in the `` raw `` format must be generated with the
same check level as that specified in the `` named `` configuration
file. Also, `` map `` format files are loaded directly into memory via
memory mapping, with only minimal checking.
This statement sets the `` masterfile-format `` for all zones, but can
be overridden on a per-zone or per-view basis by including a
`` masterfile-format `` statement within the `` zone `` or `` view `` block
in the configuration file.
`` masterfile-style ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This specifies the formatting of zone files during dump, when the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` masterfile-format `` is `` text `` . This option is ignored with any
other `` masterfile-format `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When set to `` relative `` , records are printed in a multi-line format,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with owner names expressed relative to a shared origin. When set to
`` full `` , records are printed in a single-line format with absolute
owner names. The `` full `` format is most suitable when a zone file
needs to be processed automatically by a script. The `` relative ``
format is more human-readable, and is thus suitable when a zone is to
be edited by hand. The default is `` relative `` .
`` max-recursion-depth ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of levels of recursion that are permitted at
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
any one time while servicing a recursive query. Resolving a name may
require looking up a name server address, which in turn requires
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
resolving another name, etc.; if the number of recursions exceeds
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
this value, the recursive query is terminated and returns SERVFAIL.
The default is 7.
`` max-recursion-queries ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum number of iterative queries that may be sent while
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
servicing a recursive query. If more queries are sent, the recursive
2020-03-31 13:58:16 +11:00
query is terminated and returns SERVFAIL. The default is 75.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` notify-delay ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
This sets the delay, in seconds, between sending sets of NOTIFY messages for a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone. The default is 5 seconds.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The overall rate at which NOTIFY messages are sent for all zones is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
controlled by `` serial-query-rate `` .
`` max-rsa-exponent-size ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the maximum RSA exponent size, in bits, that is accepted when
validating. Valid values are 35 to 4096 bits. The default, zero, is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
also accepted and is equivalent to 4096.
`` prefetch ``
When a query is received for cached data which is to expire shortly,
`` named `` can refresh the data from the authoritative server
immediately, ensuring that the cache always has an answer available.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` prefetch `` specifies the "trigger" TTL value at which prefetch
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
of the current query takes place; when a cache record with a
lower TTL value is encountered during query processing, it is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
refreshed. Valid trigger TTL values are 1 to 10 seconds. Values
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
larger than 10 seconds are silently reduced to 10. Setting a
trigger TTL to zero causes prefetch to be disabled. The default
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
trigger TTL is `` 2 `` .
An optional second argument specifies the "eligibility" TTL: the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
smallest *original* TTL value that is accepted for a record to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
be eligible for prefetching. The eligibility TTL must be at least six
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
seconds longer than the trigger TTL; if not, `` named ``
silently adjusts it upward. The default eligibility TTL is `` 9 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` v6-bias ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When determining the next name server to try, this indicates by how many
milliseconds to prefer IPv6 name servers. The default is `` 50 ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
milliseconds.
.. _builtin:
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Built-in Server Information Zones
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The server provides some helpful diagnostic information through a number
of built-in zones under the pseudo-top-level-domain `` bind `` in the
`` CHAOS `` class. These zones are part of a built-in view
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
(see :ref: `view_statement_grammar` ) of class `` CHAOS `` , which is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
separate from the default view of class `` IN `` . Most global
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configuration options (`` allow-query `` , etc.) apply to this view,
but some are locally overridden: `` notify `` , `` recursion `` , and
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-new-zones `` are always set to `` no `` , and `` rate-limit `` is set
to allow three responses per second.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
To disable these zones, use the options below or hide the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
built-in `` CHAOS `` view by defining an explicit view of class `` CHAOS ``
that matches all clients.
`` version ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the version the server should report via a query of the name
`` version.bind `` with type `` TXT `` and class `` CHAOS `` . The default is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the real version number of this server. Specifying `` version none ``
disables processing of the queries.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Setting `` version `` to any value (including `` none `` ) also disables
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
queries for `` authors.bind TXT CH `` .
`` hostname ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the hostname the server should report via a query of the name
`` hostname.bind `` with type `` TXT `` and class `` CHAOS `` . This defaults
to the hostname of the machine hosting the name server, as found by
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the `` gethostname() `` function. The primary purpose of such queries is to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the queries. Specifying `` hostname none; `` disables processing of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the queries.
`` server-id ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the ID the server should report when receiving a Name Server
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Identifier (NSID) query, or a query of the name `` ID.SERVER `` with
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
type `` TXT `` and class `` CHAOS `` . The primary purpose of such queries is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually answering
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the queries. Specifying `` server-id none; `` disables processing of
the queries. Specifying `` server-id hostname; `` causes `` named ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
to use the hostname as found by the `` gethostname() `` function. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default `` server-id `` is `` none `` .
.. _empty:
Built-in Empty Zones
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` named `` server has some built-in empty zones, for SOA and NS records
only. These are for zones that should normally be answered locally and for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
which queries should not be sent to the Internet's root servers. The
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
official servers that cover these namespaces return NXDOMAIN responses
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to these queries. In particular, these cover the reverse namespaces for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
addresses from :rfc: `1918` , :rfc: `4193` , :rfc: `5737` , and :rfc: `6598` . They also
include the reverse namespace for the IPv6 local address (locally assigned),
IPv6 link local addresses, the IPv6 loopback address, and the IPv6
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
unknown address.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The server attempts to determine if a built-in zone already exists
or is active (covered by a forward-only forwarding declaration) and does
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
not create an empty zone if either is true.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The current list of empty zones is:
- 10.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 16.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 17.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 18.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 19.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 20.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 21.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 22.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 23.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 24.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 25.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 26.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 27.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 28.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 29.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 30.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 31.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 168.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 64.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 65.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 66.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 67.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 68.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 69.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 70.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 71.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 72.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 73.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 74.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 75.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 76.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 77.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 78.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 79.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 80.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 81.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 82.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 83.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 84.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 85.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 86.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 87.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 88.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 89.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 90.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 91.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 92.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 93.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 94.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 95.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 96.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 97.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 98.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 99.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 100.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 101.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 102.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 103.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 104.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 105.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 106.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 107.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 108.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 109.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 110.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 111.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 112.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 113.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 114.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 115.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 116.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 117.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 118.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 119.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 120.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 121.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 122.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 123.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 124.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 125.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 126.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 127.100.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 0.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 127.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 254.169.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 100.51.198.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 113.0.203.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 255.255.255.255.IN-ADDR.ARPA
- 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA
- 1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA
- 8.B.D.0.1.0.0.2.IP6.ARPA
- D.F.IP6.ARPA
- 8.E.F.IP6.ARPA
- 9.E.F.IP6.ARPA
- A.E.F.IP6.ARPA
- B.E.F.IP6.ARPA
- EMPTY.AS112.ARPA
- HOME.ARPA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Empty zones can be set at the view level and only apply to views of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
class IN. Disabled empty zones are only inherited from options if there
are no disabled empty zones specified at the view level. To override the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
options list of disabled zones, disable the root zone at the
view level. For example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
disable-empty-zone ".";
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If using the address ranges covered here,
reverse zones covering the addresses should already be in place. In practice this
appears to not be the case, with many queries being made to the
infrastructure servers for names in these spaces. So many, in fact, that
sacrificial servers had to be deployed to channel the query load
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
away from the infrastructure servers.
.. note ::
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The real parent servers for these zones should disable all empty zones
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
under the parent zone they serve. For the real root servers, this is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
all built-in empty zones. This enables them to return referrals
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to deeper in the tree.
`` empty-server ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the server name that appears in the returned SOA record for
empty zones. If none is specified, the zone's name is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` empty-contact ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the contact name that appears in the returned SOA record for
empty zones. If none is specified, "." is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` empty-zones-enable ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This enables or disables all empty zones. By default, they are enabled.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` disable-empty-zone ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This disables individual empty zones. By default, none are disabled. This
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option can be specified multiple times.
.. _content_filtering:
Content Filtering
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
BIND 9 provides the ability to filter out responses from external
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNS servers containing certain types of data in the answer section.
Specifically, it can reject address (A or AAAA) records if the
corresponding IPv4 or IPv6 addresses match the given
`` address_match_list `` of the `` deny-answer-addresses `` option. It can
also reject CNAME or DNAME records if the "alias" name (i.e., the CNAME
alias or the substituted query name due to DNAME) matches the given
`` namelist `` of the `` deny-answer-aliases `` option, where "match" means
the alias name is a subdomain of one of the `` name_list `` elements. If
the optional `` namelist `` is specified with `` except-from `` , records
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
whose query name matches the list are accepted regardless of the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
filter setting. Likewise, if the alias name is a subdomain of the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
corresponding zone, the `` deny-answer-aliases `` filter does not apply;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for example, even if "example.com" is specified for
`` deny-answer-aliases `` ,
::
www.example.com. CNAME xxx.example.com.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
returned by an "example.com" server is accepted.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
In the `` address_match_list `` of the `` deny-answer-addresses `` option,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
only `` ip_addr `` and `` ip_prefix `` are meaningful; any `` key_id `` is
silently ignored.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If a response message is rejected due to the filtering, the entire
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
message is discarded without being cached, and a SERVFAIL error is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
returned to the client.
This filtering is intended to prevent "DNS rebinding attacks," in which
an attacker, in response to a query for a domain name the attacker
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
controls, returns an IP address within the user's own network or an alias name
within the user's own domain. A naive web browser or script could then serve
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
as an unintended proxy, allowing the attacker to get access to an
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
internal node of the local network that could not be externally accessed
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
otherwise. See the paper available at
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.1145/1315245.1315298 for more details
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
about these attacks.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
For example, with a domain named "example.net" and an internal
network using an IPv4 prefix 192.0.2.0/24, an administrator might specify the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
following rules:
::
deny-answer-addresses { 192.0.2.0/24; } except-from { "example.net"; };
deny-answer-aliases { "example.net"; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If an external attacker let a web browser in the local network look up
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
an IPv4 address of "attacker.example.com", the attacker's DNS server
would return a response like this:
::
attacker.example.com. A 192.0.2.1
in the answer section. Since the rdata of this record (the IPv4 address)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
matches the specified prefix 192.0.2.0/24, this response would be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
ignored.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
On the other hand, if the browser looked up a legitimate internal web
server "www.example.net" and the following response were returned to the
BIND 9 server:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
www.example.net. A 192.0.2.2
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
it would be accepted, since the owner name "www.example.net" matches the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` except-from `` element, "example.net".
Note that this is not really an attack on the DNS per se. In fact, there
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is nothing wrong with having an "external" name mapped to an "internal"
IP address or domain name from the DNS point of view; it might actually
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
be provided for a legitimate purpose, such as for debugging. As long as
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the mapping is provided by the correct owner, it either is not possible or does
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
not make sense to detect whether the intent of the mapping is legitimate
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
within the DNS. The "rebinding" attack must primarily be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
protected at the application that uses the DNS. For a large site,
however, it may be difficult to protect all possible applications at
once. This filtering feature is provided only to help such an
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
operational environment; turning it on is generally discouraged
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
unless there is no other choice and the attack is a
real threat to applications.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Care should be particularly taken if using this option for
addresses within 127.0.0.0/8. These addresses are obviously "internal,"
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
but many applications conventionally rely on a DNS mapping from some
name to such an address. Filtering out DNS records containing this
address spuriously can break such applications.
.. _rpz:
Response Policy Zone (RPZ) Rewriting
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
BIND 9 includes a limited mechanism to modify DNS responses for requests
2020-06-15 17:01:37 +00:00
analogous to email anti-spam DNS rejection lists. Responses can be changed to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
deny the existence of domains (NXDOMAIN), deny the existence of IP
addresses for domains (NODATA), or contain other IP addresses or data.
Response policy zones are named in the `` response-policy `` option for
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the view, or among the global options if there is no `` response-policy ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option for the view. Response policy zones are ordinary DNS zones
containing RRsets that can be queried normally if allowed. It is usually
best to restrict those queries with something like
`` allow-query { localhost; }; `` . Note that zones using
`` masterfile-format map `` cannot be used as policy zones.
A `` response-policy `` option can support multiple policy zones. To
maximize performance, a radix tree is used to quickly identify response
policy zones containing triggers that match the current query. This
imposes an upper limit of 64 on the number of policy zones in a single
`` response-policy `` option; more than that is a configuration error.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Rules encoded in response policy zones are processed after those defined in
:ref: `access_control` . All queries from clients which are not permitted access
to the resolver are answered with a status code of REFUSED, regardless of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configured RPZ rules.
Five policy triggers can be encoded in RPZ records.
`` RPZ-CLIENT-IP ``
IP records are triggered by the IP address of the DNS client. Client
IP address triggers are encoded in records that have owner names that
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
are subdomains of `` rpz-client-ip `` , relativized to the policy zone
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
origin name, and that encode an address or address block. IPv4 addresses
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
are represented as `` prefixlength.B4.B3.B2.B1.rpz-client-ip `` . The
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
IPv4 prefix length must be between 1 and 32. All four bytes - B4, B3,
B2, and B1 - must be present. B4 is the decimal value of the least
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
significant byte of the IPv4 address as in IN-ADDR.ARPA.
IPv6 addresses are encoded in a format similar to the standard IPv6
text representation,
`` prefixlength.W8.W7.W6.W5.W4.W3.W2.W1.rpz-client-ip `` . Each of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
W8,...,W1 is a one- to four-digit hexadecimal number representing 16
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
bits of the IPv6 address as in the standard text representation of
IPv6 addresses, but reversed as in IP6.ARPA. (Note that this
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
representation of IPv6 addresses is different from IP6.ARPA, where each
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hex digit occupies a label.) All 8 words must be present except when
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
one set of consecutive zero words is replaced with `` .zz. `` , analogous
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to double colons (::) in standard IPv6 text encodings. The IPv6
prefix length must be between 1 and 128.
`` QNAME ``
QNAME policy records are triggered by query names of requests and
targets of CNAME records resolved to generate the response. The owner
name of a QNAME policy record is the query name relativized to the
policy zone.
`` RPZ-IP ``
IP triggers are IP addresses in an A or AAAA record in the ANSWER
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
section of a response. They are encoded like client-IP triggers,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
except as subdomains of `` rpz-ip `` .
`` RPZ-NSDNAME ``
NSDNAME triggers match names of authoritative servers for the query name, a
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
parent of the query name, a CNAME for the query name, or a parent of a CNAME.
They are encoded as subdomains of `` rpz-nsdname `` , relativized
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to the RPZ origin name. NSIP triggers match IP addresses in A and AAAA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
RRsets for domains that can be checked against NSDNAME policy records. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` nsdname-enable `` phrase turns NSDNAME triggers off or on for a single
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
policy zone or for all zones.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If authoritative name servers for the query name are not yet known, `` named ``
recursively looks up the authoritative servers for the query name before
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
applying an RPZ-NSDNAME rule, which can cause a processing delay. To speed up
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
processing at the cost of precision, the `` nsdname-wait-recurse `` option can
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
be used; when set to `` no `` , RPZ-NSDNAME rules are only applied when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
authoritative servers for the query name have already been looked up and
cached. If authoritative servers for the query name are not in the cache,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the RPZ-NSDNAME rule is ignored, but the authoritative servers for
the query name are looked up in the background and the rule is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
applied to subsequent queries. The default is `` yes `` ,
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
meaning RPZ-NSDNAME rules are always applied, even if authoritative
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
servers for the query name need to be looked up first.
`` RPZ-NSIP ``
NSIP triggers match the IP addresses of authoritative servers. They
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are encoded like IP triggers, except as subdomains of `` rpz-nsip `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
NSDNAME and NSIP triggers are checked only for names with at least
`` min-ns-dots `` dots. The default value of `` min-ns-dots `` is 1, to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
exclude top-level domains. The `` nsip-enable `` phrase turns NSIP
triggers off or on for a single policy zone or for all zones.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If a name server's IP address is not yet known, `` named ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
recursively looks up the IP address before applying an RPZ-NSIP rule,
which can cause a processing delay. To speed up processing at the cost
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
of precision, the `` nsip-wait-recurse `` option can be used; when set
to `` no `` , RPZ-NSIP rules are only applied when a name server's
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IP address has already been looked up and cached. If a server's IP
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
address is not in the cache, the RPZ-NSIP rule is ignored,
but the address is looked up in the background and the rule
is applied to subsequent queries. The default is `` yes `` ,
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
meaning RPZ-NSIP rules are always applied, even if an address
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
needs to be looked up first.
The query response is checked against all response policy zones, so two
or more policy records can be triggered by a response. Because DNS
responses are rewritten according to at most one policy record, a single
record encoding an action (other than `` DISABLED `` actions) must be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
chosen. Triggers, or the records that encode them, are chosen for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
rewriting in the following order:
1. Choose the triggered record in the zone that appears first in the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
response-policy option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2. Prefer CLIENT-IP to QNAME to IP to NSDNAME to NSIP triggers in a
single zone.
3. Among NSDNAME triggers, prefer the trigger that matches the smallest
name under the DNSSEC ordering.
4. Among IP or NSIP triggers, prefer the trigger with the longest
prefix.
5. Among triggers with the same prefix length, prefer the IP or NSIP
trigger that matches the smallest IP address.
When the processing of a response is restarted to resolve DNAME or CNAME
records and a policy record set has not been triggered, all response
policy zones are again consulted for the DNAME or CNAME names and
addresses.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
RPZ record sets are any types of DNS record, except DNAME or DNSSEC, that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
encode actions or responses to individual queries. Any of the policies
can be used with any of the triggers. For example, while the
`` TCP-only `` policy is commonly used with `` client-IP `` triggers, it can
be used with any type of trigger to force the use of TCP for responses
with owner names in a zone.
`` PASSTHRU ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The auto-acceptance policy is specified by a CNAME whose target is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` rpz-passthru `` . It causes the response to not be rewritten and is
most often used to "poke holes" in policies for CIDR blocks.
`` DROP ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The auto-rejection policy is specified by a CNAME whose target is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` rpz-drop `` . It causes the response to be discarded. Nothing is sent
to the DNS client.
`` TCP-Only ``
The "slip" policy is specified by a CNAME whose target is
`` rpz-tcp-only `` . It changes UDP responses to short, truncated DNS
responses that require the DNS client to try again with TCP. It is
used to mitigate distributed DNS reflection attacks.
`` NXDOMAIN ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The "domain undefined" response is encoded by a CNAME whose target is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the root domain (.).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` NODATA ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The empty set of resource records is specified by a CNAME whose target
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is the wildcard top-level domain (`` *. `` ). It rewrites the response to
NODATA or ANCOUNT=0.
`` Local Data ``
A set of ordinary DNS records can be used to answer queries. Queries
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for record types not in the set are answered with NODATA.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
A special form of local data is a CNAME whose target is a wildcard
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
such as \*.example.com. It is used as if an ordinary CNAME after
the asterisk (\*) has been replaced with the query name.
This special form is useful for query logging in the walled garden's
authoritative DNS server.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
All of the actions specified in all of the individual records in a
policy zone can be overridden with a `` policy `` clause in the
`` response-policy `` option. An organization using a policy zone provided
by another organization might use this mechanism to redirect domains to
its own walled garden.
`` GIVEN ``
The placeholder policy says "do not override but perform the action
specified in the zone."
`` DISABLED ``
The testing override policy causes policy zone records to do nothing
but log what they would have done if the policy zone were not
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
disabled. The response to the DNS query is written (or not)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
according to any triggered policy records that are not disabled.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Disabled policy zones should appear first, because they are often
not logged if a higher-precedence trigger is found first.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` PASSTHRU `` ; `` DROP `` ; `` TCP-Only `` ; `` NXDOMAIN `` ; `` NODATA ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
These settings each override the corresponding per-record policy.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` CNAME domain ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This causes all RPZ policy records to act as if they were "cname domain"
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
records.
By default, the actions encoded in a response policy zone are applied
only to queries that ask for recursion (RD=1). That default can be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
changed for a single policy zone, or for all response policy zones in a view,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with a `` recursive-only no `` clause. This feature is useful for serving
the same zone files both inside and outside an :rfc: `1918` cloud and using
RPZ to delete answers that would otherwise contain :rfc: `1918` values on
the externally visible name server or view.
Also by default, RPZ actions are applied only to DNS requests that
either do not request DNSSEC metadata (DO=0) or when no DNSSEC records
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are available for the requested name in the original zone (not the response
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
policy zone). This default can be changed for all response policy zones
in a view with a `` break-dnssec yes `` clause. In that case, RPZ actions
are applied regardless of DNSSEC. The name of the clause option reflects
the fact that results rewritten by RPZ actions cannot verify.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
No DNS records are needed for a QNAME or Client-IP trigger; the name or
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IP address itself is sufficient, so in principle the query name need not
be recursively resolved. However, not resolving the requested name can
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
leak the fact that response policy rewriting is in use, and that the name
is listed in a policy zone, to operators of servers for listed names. To
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
prevent that information leak, by default any recursion needed for a
request is done before any policy triggers are considered. Because
listed domains often have slow authoritative servers, this behavior can
cost significant time. The `` qname-wait-recurse yes `` option overrides
the default and enables that behavior when recursion cannot change a
non-error response. The option does not affect QNAME or client-IP
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
triggers in policy zones listed after other zones containing IP, NSIP,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and NSDNAME triggers, because those may depend on the A, AAAA, and NS
records that would be found during recursive resolution. It also does
not affect DNSSEC requests (DO=1) unless `` break-dnssec yes `` is in use,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
because the response would depend on whether RRSIG records were
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
found during resolution. Using this option can cause error responses
such as SERVFAIL to appear to be rewritten, since no recursion is being
done to discover problems at the authoritative server.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` dnsrps-enable yes `` option turns on the DNS Response Policy Service
(DNSRPS) interface, if it has been compiled in `` named `` using
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` configure --enable-dnsrps `` .
The `` dnsrps-options `` block provides additional RPZ configuration
settings, which are passed through to the DNSRPS provider library.
Multiple DNSRPS settings in an `` dnsrps-options `` string should be
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
separated with semi-colons (;). The DNSRPS provider, librpz, is passed a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configuration string consisting of the `` dnsrps-options `` text,
concatenated with settings derived from the `` response-policy ``
statement.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Note: the `` dnsrps-options `` text should only include configuration
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
settings that are specific to the DNSRPS provider. For example, the
DNSRPS provider from Farsight Security takes options such as
`` dnsrpzd-conf `` , `` dnsrpzd-sock `` , and `` dnzrpzd-args `` (for details of
these options, see the `` librpz `` documentation). Other RPZ
configuration settings could be included in `` dnsrps-options `` as well,
but if `` named `` were switched back to traditional RPZ by setting
`` dnsrps-enable `` to "no", those options would be ignored.
The TTL of a record modified by RPZ policies is set from the TTL of the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
relevant record in the policy zone. It is then limited to a maximum value.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` max-policy-ttl `` clause changes the maximum number of seconds from its
default of 5. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
For example, an administrator might use this option statement:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
response-policy { zone "badlist"; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
and this zone statement:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
zone "badlist" {type primary; file "primary/badlist"; allow-query {none;}; };
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
with this zone file:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
$TTL 1H
@ SOA LOCALHOST. named-mgr.example.com (1 1h 15m 30d 2h)
NS LOCALHOST.
; QNAME policy records. There are no periods (.) after the owner names.
nxdomain.domain.com CNAME . ; NXDOMAIN policy
*.nxdomain.domain.com CNAME . ; NXDOMAIN policy
nodata.domain.com CNAME *. ; NODATA policy
*.nodata.domain.com CNAME * . ; NODATA policy
bad.domain.com A 10.0.0.1 ; redirect to a walled garden
AAAA 2001:2::1
bzone.domain.com CNAME garden.example.com.
; do not rewrite (PASSTHRU) OK.DOMAIN.COM
ok.domain.com CNAME rpz-passthru.
; redirect x.bzone.domain.com to x.bzone.domain.com.garden.example.com
*.bzone.domain.com CNAME * .garden.example.com.
; IP policy records that rewrite all responses containing A records in 127/8
; except 127.0.0.1
8.0.0.0.127.rpz-ip CNAME .
32.1.0.0.127.rpz-ip CNAME rpz-passthru.
; NSDNAME and NSIP policy records
ns.domain.com.rpz-nsdname CNAME .
48.zz.2.2001.rpz-nsip CNAME .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
; auto-reject and auto-accept some DNS clients
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
112.zz.2001.rpz-client-ip CNAME rpz-drop.
8.0.0.0.127.rpz-client-ip CNAME rpz-drop.
; force some DNS clients and responses in the example.com zone to TCP
16.0.0.1.10.rpz-client-ip CNAME rpz-tcp-only.
example.com CNAME rpz-tcp-only.
*.example.com CNAME rpz-tcp-only.
RPZ can affect server performance. Each configured response policy zone
requires the server to perform one to four additional database lookups
before a query can be answered. For example, a DNS server with four
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
policy zones, each with all four kinds of response triggers (QNAME, IP,
NSIP, and NSDNAME), requires a total of 17 times as many database lookups
as a similar DNS server with no response policy zones. A BIND 9 server
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with adequate memory and one response policy zone with QNAME and IP
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
triggers might achieve a maximum queries-per-second (QPS) rate about 20%
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
lower. A server with four response policy zones with QNAME and IP
triggers might have a maximum QPS rate about 50% lower.
Responses rewritten by RPZ are counted in the `` RPZRewrites ``
statistics.
The `` log `` clause can be used to optionally turn off rewrite logging
for a particular response policy zone. By default, all rewrites are
logged.
The `` add-soa `` option controls whether the RPZ's SOA record is added to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the section for traceback of changes from this zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This can be set at the individual policy zone level or at the
response-policy level. The default is `` yes `` .
Updates to RPZ zones are processed asynchronously; if there is more than
one update pending they are bundled together. If an update to a RPZ zone
(for example, via IXFR) happens less than `` min-update-interval ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
seconds after the most recent update, the changes are not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
carried out until this interval has elapsed. The default is `` 60 ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
seconds. For convenience, TTL-style time-unit suffixes may be used to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specify the value. It also accepts ISO 8601 duration formats.
.. _rrl:
Response Rate Limiting
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Excessive, almost-identical UDP *responses* can be controlled by
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configuring a `` rate-limit `` clause in an `` options `` or `` view ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
statement. This mechanism keeps authoritative BIND 9 from being used to
amplify reflection denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. Short, truncated
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(TC=1) responses can be sent to provide rate-limited responses to
legitimate clients within a range of forged, attacked IP addresses.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
Legitimate clients react to dropped or truncated responses by retrying
with UDP or with TCP, respectively.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
This mechanism is intended for authoritative DNS servers. It can be used
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
on recursive servers, but can slow applications such as SMTP servers
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(mail receivers) and HTTP clients (web browsers) that repeatedly request
the same domains. When possible, closing "open" recursive servers is
better.
Response rate limiting uses a "credit" or "token bucket" scheme. Each
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
combination of identical response and client has a conceptual "account"
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
that earns a specified number of credits every second. A prospective
response debits its account by one. Responses are dropped or truncated
while the account is negative. Responses are tracked within a rolling
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
window of time which defaults to 15 seconds, but which can be configured with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the `` window `` option to any value from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The
account cannot become more positive than the per-second limit or more
negative than `` window `` times the per-second limit. When the specified
number of credits for a class of responses is set to 0, those responses
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are not rate-limited.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The notions of "identical response" and "DNS client" for rate limiting
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
are not simplistic. All responses to an address block are counted as if
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
to a single client. The prefix lengths of address blocks are specified
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with `` ipv4-prefix-length `` (default 24) and `` ipv6-prefix-length ``
(default 56).
All non-empty responses for a valid domain name (qname) and record type
(qtype) are identical and have a limit specified with
`` responses-per-second `` (default 0 or no limit). All empty (NODATA)
responses for a valid domain, regardless of query type, are identical.
Responses in the NODATA class are limited by `` nodata-per-second ``
(default `` responses-per-second `` ). Requests for any and all undefined
subdomains of a given valid domain result in NXDOMAIN errors, and are
identical regardless of query type. They are limited by
`` nxdomains-per-second `` (default `` responses-per-second `` ). This
controls some attacks using random names, but can be relaxed or turned
off (set to 0) on servers that expect many legitimate NXDOMAIN
2020-06-15 17:01:37 +00:00
responses, such as from anti-spam rejection lists. Referrals or delegations
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to the server of a given domain are identical and are limited by
`` referrals-per-second `` (default `` responses-per-second `` ).
Responses generated from local wildcards are counted and limited as if
they were for the parent domain name. This controls flooding using
random.wild.example.com.
All requests that result in DNS errors other than NXDOMAIN, such as
SERVFAIL and FORMERR, are identical regardless of requested name (qname)
or record type (qtype). This controls attacks using invalid requests or
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
distant, broken authoritative servers. By default the limit on errors is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the same as the `` responses-per-second `` value, but it can be set
separately with `` errors-per-second `` .
Many attacks using DNS involve UDP requests with forged source
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
addresses. Rate limiting prevents the use of BIND 9 to flood a network
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with responses to requests with forged source addresses, but could let a
third party block responses to legitimate requests. There is a mechanism
that can answer some legitimate requests from a client whose address is
being forged in a flood. Setting `` slip `` to 2 (its default) causes
every other UDP request to be answered with a small truncated (TC=1)
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
response. The small size and reduced frequency, and resulting lack of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
amplification, of "slipped" responses make them unattractive for
reflection DoS attacks. `` slip `` must be between 0 and 10. A value of 0
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
does not "slip"; no truncated responses are sent due to rate limiting. Rather,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
all responses are dropped. A value of 1 causes every response to slip;
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
values between 2 and 10 cause every nth response to slip. Some error
responses, including REFUSED and SERVFAIL, cannot be replaced with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
truncated responses and are instead leaked at the `` slip `` rate.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
(Note: dropped responses from an authoritative server may reduce the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
difficulty of a third party successfully forging a response to a
recursive resolver. The best security against forged responses is for
authoritative operators to sign their zones using DNSSEC and for
resolver operators to validate the responses. When this is not an
option, operators who are more concerned with response integrity than
with flood mitigation may consider setting `` slip `` to 1, causing all
rate-limited responses to be truncated rather than dropped. This reduces
the effectiveness of rate-limiting against reflection attacks.)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When the approximate query-per-second rate exceeds the `` qps-scale ``
value, the `` responses-per-second `` , `` errors-per-second `` ,
`` nxdomains-per-second `` , and `` all-per-second `` values are reduced by
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the ratio of the current rate to the `` qps-scale `` value. This feature
can tighten defenses during attacks. For example, with
`` qps-scale 250; responses-per-second 20; `` and a total query rate of
1000 queries/second for all queries from all DNS clients including via
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
TCP, then the effective responses/second limit changes to (250/1000)*20,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
or 5. Responses sent via TCP are not limited but are counted to compute
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the query-per-second rate.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Communities of DNS clients can be given their own parameters or no
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
rate limiting by putting `` rate-limit `` statements in `` view `` statements
instead of in the global `` option `` statement. A `` rate-limit `` statement
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
in a view replaces, rather than supplements, a `` rate-limit ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
statement among the main options. DNS clients within a view can be
exempted from rate limits with the `` exempt-clients `` clause.
UDP responses of all kinds can be limited with the `` all-per-second ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
phrase. This rate limiting is unlike the rate limiting provided by
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` responses-per-second `` , `` errors-per-second `` , and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` nxdomains-per-second `` on a DNS server, which are often invisible to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the victim of a DNS reflection attack. Unless the forged requests of the
attack are the same as the legitimate requests of the victim, the
victim's requests are not affected. Responses affected by an
`` all-per-second `` limit are always dropped; the `` slip `` value has no
effect. An `` all-per-second `` limit should be at least 4 times as large
as the other limits, because single DNS clients often send bursts of
legitimate requests. For example, the receipt of a single mail message
can prompt requests from an SMTP server for NS, PTR, A, and AAAA records
as the incoming SMTP/TCP/IP connection is considered. The SMTP server
can need additional NS, A, AAAA, MX, TXT, and SPF records as it
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
considers the SMTP `` Mail From `` command. Web browsers often repeatedly
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
resolve the same names that are duplicated in HTML <IMG> tags in a page.
`` all-per-second `` is similar to the rate limiting offered by firewalls
but is often inferior. Attacks that justify ignoring the contents of DNS
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
responses are likely to be attacks on the DNS server itself. They
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
usually should be discarded before the DNS server spends resources making
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
TCP connections or parsing DNS requests, but that rate limiting must be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
done before the DNS server sees the requests.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The maximum size of the table used to track requests and rate-limit
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
responses is set with `` max-table-size `` . Each entry in the table is
between 40 and 80 bytes. The table needs approximately as many entries
as the number of requests received per second. The default is 20,000. To
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
reduce the cold start of growing the table, `` min-table-size `` (default 500)
can set the minimum table size. Enable `` rate-limit `` category
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
logging to monitor expansions of the table and inform choices for the
initial and maximum table size.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Use `` log-only yes `` to test rate-limiting parameters without actually
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
dropping any requests.
Responses dropped by rate limits are included in the `` RateDropped `` and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` QryDropped `` statistics. Responses that are truncated by rate limits are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
included in `` RateSlipped `` and `` RespTruncated `` .
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
NXDOMAIN Redirection
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` supports NXDOMAIN redirection via two methods:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
- Redirect zone (:ref: `zone_statement_grammar` )
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
- Redirect namespace
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
With either method, when `` named `` gets an NXDOMAIN response it examines a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
separate namespace to see if the NXDOMAIN response should be replaced
with an alternative response.
With a redirect zone (`` zone "." { type redirect; }; `` ), the data used
to replace the NXDOMAIN is held in a single zone which is not part of
the normal namespace. All the redirect information is contained in the
zone; there are no delegations.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
With a redirect namespace (`` option { nxdomain-redirect <suffix> }; `` ),
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the data used to replace the NXDOMAIN is part of the normal namespace
and is looked up by appending the specified suffix to the original
query name. This roughly doubles the cache required to process
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
NXDOMAIN responses, as both the original NXDOMAIN response and the
replacement data (or an NXDOMAIN indicating that there is no
replacement) must be stored.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If both a redirect zone and a redirect namespace are configured, the
redirect zone is tried first.
.. _server_statement_grammar:
`` server `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/server.grammar.rst
.. _server_statement_definition_and_usage:
`` server `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` server `` statement defines characteristics to be associated with a
remote name server. If a prefix length is specified, then a range of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
servers is covered. Only the most specific server clause applies,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
regardless of the order in `` named.conf `` .
The `` server `` statement can occur at the top level of the configuration
file or inside a `` view `` statement. If a `` view `` statement contains
one or more `` server `` statements, only those apply to the view and any
top-level ones are ignored. If a view contains no `` server `` statements,
any top-level `` server `` statements are used as defaults.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If a remote server is giving out bad data, marking it
as bogus prevents further queries to it. The default value of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` bogus `` is `` no `` .
The `` provide-ixfr `` clause determines whether the local server, acting
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
as primary, responds with an incremental zone transfer when the given
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
remote server, a secondary, requests it. If set to `` yes `` , incremental
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
transfer is provided whenever possible. If set to `` no `` , all
transfers to the remote server are non-incremental. If not set, the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
value of the `` provide-ixfr `` option in the view or global options block
is used as a default.
The `` request-ixfr `` clause determines whether the local server, acting
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
as a secondary, requests incremental zone transfers from the given
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
remote server, a primary. If not set, the value of the `` request-ixfr ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
option in the view or global options block is used as a default. It may
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
also be set in the zone block; if set there, it overrides the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
global or view setting for that zone.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR automatically
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
fall back to AXFR. Therefore, there is no need to manually list which
servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global default of
`` yes `` should always work. The purpose of the `` provide-ixfr `` and
`` request-ixfr `` clauses is to make it possible to disable the use of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
IXFR even when both primary and secondary claim to support it: for example, if
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
one of the servers is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is
used.
The `` request-expire `` clause determines whether the local server, when
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
acting as a secondary, requests the EDNS EXPIRE value. The EDNS EXPIRE
value indicates the remaining time before the zone data expires and
needs to be refreshed. This is used when a secondary server transfers
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
a zone from another secondary server; when transferring from the
primary, the expiration timer is set from the EXPIRE field of the SOA
record instead. The default is `` yes `` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` edns `` clause determines whether the local server attempts to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
use EDNS when communicating with the remote server. The default is
`` yes `` .
The `` edns-udp-size `` option sets the EDNS UDP size that is advertised
by `` named `` when querying the remote server. Valid values are 512 to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
4096 bytes; values outside this range are silently adjusted to the
nearest value within it. This option is useful when
advertising a different value to this server than the value advertised
globally: for example, when there is a firewall at the remote site that
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
is blocking large replies. Note: currently, this sets a single UDP size
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for all packets sent to the server; `` named `` does not deviate from this
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
value. This differs from the behavior of `` edns-udp-size `` in
`` options `` or `` view `` statements, where it specifies a maximum value.
The `` server `` statement behavior may be brought into conformance with
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the `` options `` /`` view `` behavior in future releases.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` edns-version `` option sets the maximum EDNS VERSION that is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
sent to the server(s) by the resolver. The actual EDNS version sent is
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
still subject to normal EDNS version-negotiation rules (see :rfc: `6891` ),
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the maximum EDNS version supported by the server, and any other
heuristics that indicate that a lower version should be sent. This
option is intended to be used when a remote server reacts badly to a
given EDNS version or higher; it should be set to the highest version
the remote server is known to support. Valid values are 0 to 255; higher
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
values are silently adjusted. This option is not needed until
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
higher EDNS versions than 0 are in use.
The `` max-udp-size `` option sets the maximum EDNS UDP message size
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` sends. Valid values are 512 to 4096 bytes; values outside
this range are silently adjusted. This option is useful when
there is a firewall that is blocking large replies from
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` named `` .
The `` padding `` option adds EDNS Padding options to outgoing messages,
increasing the packet size to a multiple of the specified block size.
Valid block sizes range from 0 (the default, which disables the use of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
EDNS Padding) to 512 bytes. Larger values are reduced to 512, with a
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
logged warning. Note: this option is not currently compatible with no
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
TSIG or SIG(0), as the EDNS OPT record containing the padding would have
to be added to the packet after it had already been signed.
The `` tcp-only `` option sets the transport protocol to TCP. The default
is to use the UDP transport and to fallback on TCP only when a truncated
response is received.
The `` tcp-keepalive `` option adds EDNS TCP keepalive to messages sent
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
over TCP. Note that currently idle timeouts in responses are ignored.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first,
`` one-answer `` , uses one DNS message per resource record transferred.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` many-answers `` packs as many resource records as possible into a single
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
message, which is more efficient.
It is possible to specify which method to use for a server via the
`` transfer-format `` option; if not set there, the
`` transfer-format `` specified by the `` options `` statement is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` transfers `` is used to limit the number of concurrent inbound zone
transfers from the specified server. If no `` transfers `` clause is
specified, the limit is set according to the `` transfers-per-ns ``
option.
The `` keys `` clause identifies a `` key_id `` defined by the `` key ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
statement, to be used for transaction security (see :ref: `tsig` )
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
when talking to the remote server. When a request is sent to the remote
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
server, a request signature is generated using the key specified
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
here and appended to the message. A request originating from the remote
server is not required to be signed by this key.
Only a single key per server is currently supported.
The `` transfer-source `` and `` transfer-source-v6 `` clauses specify the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
IPv4 and IPv6 source address, respectively, to be used for zone transfer with the
remote server. For an IPv4 remote server, only
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` transfer-source `` can be specified. Similarly, for an IPv6 remote
server, only `` transfer-source-v6 `` can be specified. For more details,
see the description of `` transfer-source `` and `` transfer-source-v6 `` in
:ref: `zone_transfers` .
The `` notify-source `` and `` notify-source-v6 `` clauses specify the IPv4
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
and IPv6 source address, respectively, to be used for notify messages sent to remote
servers. For an IPv4 remote server, only `` notify-source ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
can be specified. Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
`` notify-source-v6 `` can be specified.
The `` query-source `` and `` query-source-v6 `` clauses specify the IPv4
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
and IPv6 source address, respectively, to be used for queries sent to remote servers.
For an IPv4 remote server, only `` query-source `` can be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specified. Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
`` query-source-v6 `` can be specified.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` request-nsid `` clause determines whether the local server adds
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
an NSID EDNS option to requests sent to the server. This overrides
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` request-nsid `` set at the view or option level.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` send-cookie `` clause determines whether the local server adds
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
a COOKIE EDNS option to requests sent to the server. This overrides
`` send-cookie `` set at the view or option level. The `` named `` server
may determine that COOKIE is not supported by the remote server and not
add a COOKIE EDNS option to requests.
.. _statschannels:
`` statistics-channels `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/statistics-channels.grammar.rst
.. _statistics_channels:
`` statistics-channels `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` statistics-channels `` statement declares communication channels to
be used by system administrators to get access to statistics information
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
on the name server.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This statement is intended to be flexible to support multiple communication
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
protocols in the future, but currently only HTTP access is supported. It
requires that BIND 9 be compiled with libxml2 and/or json-c (also known
as libjson0); the `` statistics-channels `` statement is still accepted
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
even if it is built without the library, but any HTTP access fails
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with an error.
An `` inet `` control channel is a TCP socket listening at the specified
`` ip_port `` on the specified `` ip_addr `` , which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address. An `` ip_addr `` of `` * `` (asterisk) is interpreted as the IPv4
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
wildcard address; connections are accepted on any of the system's
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
IPv4 addresses. To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address, use an
`` ip_addr `` of `` :: `` .
If no port is specified, port 80 is used for HTTP channels. The asterisk
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(`` * `` ) cannot be used for `` ip_port `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Attempts to open a statistics channel are restricted by the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
optional `` allow `` clause. Connections to the statistics channel are
permitted based on the `` address_match_list `` . If no `` allow `` clause is
present, `` named `` accepts connection attempts from any address; since
the statistics may contain sensitive internal information, it is highly
recommended to restrict the source of connection requests appropriately.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If no `` statistics-channels `` statement is present, `` named `` does not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
open any communication channels.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The statistics are available in various formats and views, depending on
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the URI used to access them. For example, if the statistics channel is
configured to listen on 127.0.0.1 port 8888, then the statistics are
accessible in XML format at http://127.0.0.1:8888/ or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml. A CSS file is included, which can format the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
XML statistics into tables when viewed with a stylesheet-capable
browser, and into charts and graphs using the Google Charts API when
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
using a JavaScript-capable browser.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Broken-out subsets of the statistics can be viewed at
http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/status (server uptime and last
reconfiguration time), http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/server (server and
resolver statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/zones (zone
statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/net (network status and socket
statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/mem (memory manager
statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/tasks (task manager
statistics), and http://127.0.0.1:8888/xml/v3/traffic (traffic sizes).
The full set of statistics can also be read in JSON format at
http://127.0.0.1:8888/json, with the broken-out subsets at
http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/status (server uptime and last
reconfiguration time), http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/server (server and
resolver statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/zones (zone
statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/net (network status and
socket statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/mem (memory manager
statistics), http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/tasks (task manager
statistics), and http://127.0.0.1:8888/json/v1/traffic (traffic sizes).
.. _trust_anchors:
`` trust-anchors `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/trust-anchors.grammar.rst
.. _trust-anchors:
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` trust-anchors `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` trust-anchors `` statement defines DNSSEC trust anchors. DNSSEC is
described in :ref: `DNSSEC` .
A trust anchor is defined when the public key or public key digest for a non-authoritative
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone is known but cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
because it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is unsigned.
Once a key or digest has been configured as a trust anchor, it is treated as if it
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
has been validated and proven secure.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The resolver attempts DNSSEC validation on all DNS data in subdomains of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configured trust anchors. Validation below specified names can be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
temporarily disabled by using `` rndc nta `` , or permanently disabled with
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the `` validate-except `` option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
All keys listed in `` trust-anchors `` , and their corresponding zones, are
deemed to exist regardless of what parent zones say. Only keys
configured as trust anchors are used to validate the DNSKEY RRset for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the corresponding name. The parent's DS RRset is not used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` trust-anchors `` may be set at the top level of `` named.conf `` or within
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
a view. If it is set in both places, the configurations are additive;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
keys defined at the top level are inherited by all views, but keys
defined in a view are only used within that view.
The `` trust-anchors `` statement can contain
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
multiple trust-anchor entries, each consisting of a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
domain name, followed by an "anchor type" keyword indicating
the trust anchor's format, followed by the key or digest data.
If the anchor type is `` static-key `` or
`` initial-key `` , then it is followed with the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
key's flags, protocol, and algorithm, plus the Base64 representation
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of the public key data. This is identical to the text
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
representation of a DNSKEY record. Spaces, tabs, newlines, and
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
carriage returns are ignored in the key data, so the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configuration may be split into multiple lines.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If the anchor type is `` static-ds `` or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` initial-ds `` , it is followed with the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
key tag, algorithm, digest type, and the hexadecimal
representation of the key digest. This is identical to the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
text representation of a DS record. Spaces, tabs, newlines,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and carriage returns are ignored.
Trust anchors configured with the
`` static-key `` or `` static-ds ``
anchor types are immutable, while keys configured with
`` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
can be kept up-to-date automatically, without intervention from the resolver operator.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(`` static-key `` keys are identical to keys configured using the
deprecated `` trusted-keys `` statement.)
Suppose, for example, that a zone's key-signing key was compromised, and
the zone owner had to revoke and replace the key. A resolver which had
the original key
configured using `` static-key `` or
`` static-ds `` would be unable to validate
this zone any longer; it would reply with a SERVFAIL response
code. This would continue until the resolver operator had
updated the `` trust-anchors `` statement with
the new key.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If, however, the trust anchor had been configured using
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
instead, the zone owner could add a "stand-by" key to
the zone in advance. `` named `` would store
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the stand-by key, and when the original key was revoked,
`` named `` would be able to transition smoothly
to the new key. It would also recognize that the old key had
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
been revoked and cease using that key to validate answers,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
minimizing the damage that the compromised key could do.
This is the process used to keep the ICANN root DNSSEC key
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
up-to-date.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Whereas `` static-key `` and
`` static-ds `` trust anchors continue
to be trusted until they are removed from
`` named.conf `` , an
`` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is only trusted *once* : for as long as it
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
takes to load the managed key database and start the
:rfc: `5011` key maintenance process.
It is not possible to mix static with initial trust anchors
for the same domain name.
The first time `` named `` runs with an
`` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configured in `` named.conf `` , it fetches the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSKEY RRset directly from the zone apex,
and validates it
using the trust anchor specified in `` trust-anchors `` .
If the DNSKEY RRset is validly signed by a key matching
the trust anchor, then it is used as the basis for a new
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
managed-keys database.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
From that point on, whenever `` named `` runs, it sees the `` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds ``
listed in `` trust-anchors `` , checks to make sure :rfc: `5011` key maintenance
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
has already been initialized for the specified domain, and if so,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
simply moves on. The key specified in the `` trust-anchors `` statement is
not used to validate answers; it is superseded by the key or keys stored
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
in the managed-keys database.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The next time `` named `` runs after an `` initial-key `` or `` initial-ds `` has been *removed*
2020-09-10 11:38:07 +02:00
from the `` trust-anchors `` statement (or changed to a `` static-key `` or `` static-ds `` ), the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
corresponding zone is removed from the managed-keys database, and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
:rfc: `5011` key maintenance is no longer used for that domain.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
In the current implementation, the managed-keys database is stored as a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
master-format zone file.
On servers which do not use views, this file is named
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` managed-keys.bind `` . When views are in use, there is a separate
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
managed-keys database for each view; the filename is the view name
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(or, if a view name contains characters which would make it illegal as a
filename, a hash of the view name), followed by the suffix `` .mkeys `` .
When the key database is changed, the zone is updated. As with any other
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
dynamic zone, changes are written into a journal file, e.g.,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` managed-keys.bind.jnl `` or `` internal.mkeys.jnl `` . Changes are
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
committed to the primary file as soon as possible afterward,
usually within 30 seconds. Whenever `` named `` is using
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
automatic key maintenance, the zone file and journal file can be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
expected to exist in the working directory. (For this reason, among
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
others, the working directory should be always be writable by
`` named `` .)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
If the `` dnssec-validation `` option is set to `` auto `` , `` named ``
automatically initializes an `` initial-key `` for the root zone. The key
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
that is used to initialize the key-maintenance process is stored in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` bind.keys `` ; the location of this file can be overridden with the
`` bindkeys-file `` option. As a fallback in the event no `` bind.keys ``
can be found, the initializing key is also compiled directly into
`` named `` .
.. _dnssec_policy_grammar:
.. include :: ../misc/dnssec-policy.grammar.rst
.. _dnssec_policy:
The `` dnssec-policy `` statement defines a key and
signing policy (KASP) for zones.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A KASP determines how one or more zones are signed
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with DNSSEC. For example, it specifies how often keys should
roll, which cryptographic algorithms to use, and how often RRSIG
records need to be refreshed.
Keys are not shared among zones, which means that one set of keys
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
per zone is generated even if they have the same policy.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If multiple views are configured with different versions of the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
same zone, each separate version uses the same set of signing
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
keys.
Multiple key and signing policies can be configured. To
attach a policy to a zone, add a `` dnssec-policy ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
option to the `` zone `` statement, specifying the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name of the policy that should be used.
Key rollover timing is computed for each key according to
the key lifetime defined in the KASP. The lifetime may be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
modified by zone TTLs and propagation delays, to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
prevent validation failures. When a key reaches the end of its
lifetime,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named `` generates and publishes a new key
automatically, then deactivates the old key and activates the
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
new one; finally, the old key is retired according to a computed
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
schedule.
Zone-signing key (ZSK) rollovers require no operator input.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Key-signing key (KSK) and combined-signing key (CSK) rollovers
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
require action to be taken to submit a DS record to the parent.
Rollover timing for KSKs and CSKs is adjusted to take into account
delays in processing and propagating DS updates.
There are two predefined `` dnssec-policy `` names:
`` none `` and `` default `` .
Setting a zone's policy to
`` none `` is the same as not setting
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` dnssec-policy `` at all; the zone is not
signed. Policy `` default `` causes the
zone to be signed with a single combined-signing key (CSK)
using algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256; this key has an
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
unlimited lifetime. (A verbose copy of this policy
may be found in the source tree, in the file
`` doc/misc/dnssec-policy.default.conf `` .)
.. note ::
The default signing policy may change in future releases.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This could require changes to a signing policy
when upgrading to a new version of BIND. Check
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the release notes carefully when upgrading to be informed
of such changes. To prevent policy changes on upgrade,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
use an explicitly defined `` dnssec-policy `` ,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
rather than `` default `` .
If a `` dnssec-policy `` statement is modified
and the server restarted or reconfigured, `` named ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
attempts to change the policy smoothly from the old one to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the new. For example, if the key algorithm is changed, then
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
a new key is generated with the new algorithm, and the old
algorithm is retired when the existing key's lifetime ends.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. note ::
Rolling to a new policy while another key rollover is
already in progress is not yet supported, and may result in
unexpected behavior.
The following options can be specified in a `` dnssec-policy `` statement:
`` dnskey-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This indicates the TTL to use when generating DNSKEY resource records. The default is 1
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
hour (3600 seconds).
`` keys ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is a list specifying the algorithms and roles to use when
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
generating keys and signing the zone.
Entries in this list do not represent specific
DNSSEC keys, which may be changed on a regular basis,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
but the roles that keys play in the signing policy.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
For example, configuring a KSK of algorithm RSASHA256 ensures
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
that the DNSKEY RRset always includes a key-signing key
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for that algorithm.
Here is an example (for illustration purposes only) of
some possible entries in a `` keys ``
list:
::
keys {
ksk key-directory lifetime unlimited algorithm rsasha1 2048;
zsk lifetime P30D algorithm 8;
csk lifetime P6MT12H3M15S algorithm ecdsa256;
};
This example specifies that three keys should be used
in the zone. The first token determines which role the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
key plays in signing RRsets. If set to
`` ksk `` , then this is
a key-signing key; it has the KSK flag set and
is only used to sign DNSKEY, CDS, and CDNSKEY RRsets.
If set to `` zsk `` , this is
a zone-signing key; the KSK flag is unset, and
the key signs all RRsets *except*
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSKEY, CDS, and CDNSKEY. If set to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` csk `` , the key has the KSK
flag set and is used to sign all RRsets.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
An optional second token determines where the key is
stored. Currently, keys can only be stored in the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configured `` key-directory `` . This token
may be used in the future to store keys in hardware
service modules or separate directories.
The `` lifetime `` parameter specifies how
long a key may be used before rolling over. In the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
example above, the first key has an unlimited
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
lifetime, the second key may be used for 30 days, and the
third key has a rather peculiar lifetime of 6 months,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
12 hours, 3 minutes, and 15 seconds. A lifetime of 0
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
seconds is the same as `` unlimited `` .
Note that the lifetime of a key may be extended if
retiring it too soon would cause validation failures.
For example, if the key were configured to roll more
frequently than its own TTL, its lifetime would
automatically be extended to account for this.
The `` algorithm `` parameter specifies
the key's algorithm, expressed either as a string
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
("rsasha256", "ecdsa384", etc.) or as a decimal number.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
An optional second parameter specifies the key's size
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
in bits. If it is omitted, as shown in the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
example for the second and third keys, an appropriate
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
default size for the algorithm is used.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` publish-safety ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is a margin that is added to the pre-publication
interval in rollover timing calculations, to give some
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
extra time to cover unforeseen events. This increases
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the time between when keys are published and when they become active.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` PT1H `` (1 hour).
`` retire-safety ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is a margin that is added to the post-publication interval
in rollover timing calculations, to give some extra time
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to cover unforeseen events. This increases the time a key
remains published after it is no longer active. The
default is `` PT1H `` (1 hour).
`` signatures-refresh ``
This determines how frequently an RRSIG record needs to be
refreshed. The signature is renewed when the time until
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
the expiration time is less than the specified interval.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default is `` P5D `` (5 days), meaning
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
signatures that expire in 5 days or sooner are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
refreshed.
`` signatures-validity ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This indicates the validity period of an RRSIG record (subject to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
inception offset and jitter). The default is
`` P2W `` (2 weeks).
`` signatures-validity-dnskey ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is similar to `` signatures-validity `` , but for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
DNSKEY records. The default is `` P2W ``
(2 weeks).
`` max-zone-ttl ``
Like the `` max-zone-ttl `` zone option,
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
this specifies the maximum permissible TTL value, in
seconds, for the zone. When loading a zone file using
a `` masterfile-format `` of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` text `` or `` raw `` ,
any record encountered with a TTL higher than
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` max-zone-ttl `` is capped at the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
maximum permissible TTL value.
This is needed in DNSSEC-maintained zones because when
rolling to a new DNSKEY, the old key needs to remain
available until RRSIG records have expired from caches.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
The `` max-zone-ttl `` option guarantees that
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the largest TTL in the zone is no higher than the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
set value.
.. note ::
Because `` map `` -format files
load directly into memory, this option cannot be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
used with them.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The default value is `` PT24H `` (24 hours).
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
A `` max-zone-ttl `` of zero is treated as if
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the default value were in use.
`` zone-propagation-delay ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the expected propagation delay from the time when a zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is first updated to the time when the new version of the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone is served by all secondary servers. The default
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is `` PT5M `` (5 minutes).
`` parent-ds-ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the TTL of the DS RRset that the parent zone uses. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` P1D `` (1 day).
`` parent-propagation-delay ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is the expected propagation delay from the time when the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
parent zone is updated to the time when the new version
is served by all of the parent zone's name servers.
The default is `` PT1H `` (1 hour).
.. _managed-keys:
`` managed-keys `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/managed-keys.grammar.rst
.. _managed_keys:
`` managed-keys `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` managed-keys `` statement has been
deprecated in favor of :ref: `trust_anchors`
with the `` initial-key `` keyword.
.. _trusted-keys:
`` trusted-keys `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/trusted-keys.grammar.rst
.. _trusted_keys:
`` trusted-keys `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` trusted-keys `` statement has been deprecated in favor of
:ref: `trust_anchors` with the `` static-key `` keyword.
.. _view_statement_grammar:
`` view `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
::
view view_name [ class ] {
match-clients { address_match_list } ;
match-destinations { address_match_list } ;
match-recursive-only yes_or_no ;
[ view_option ; ... ]
[ zone_statement ; ... ]
} ;
.. _view_statement:
`` view `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The `` view `` statement is a powerful feature of BIND 9 that lets a name
server answer a DNS query differently depending on who is asking. It is
particularly useful for implementing split DNS setups without having to
run multiple servers.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Each `` view `` statement defines a view of the DNS namespace that is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
seen by a subset of clients. A client matches a view if its source IP
address matches the `` address_match_list `` of the view's
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` match-clients `` clause, and its destination IP address matches the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` address_match_list `` of the view's `` match-destinations `` clause. If
not specified, both `` match-clients `` and `` match-destinations `` default
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
to matching all addresses. In addition to checking IP addresses,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` match-clients `` and `` match-destinations `` can also take `` keys ``
which provide an mechanism for the client to select the view. A view can
also be specified as `` match-recursive-only `` , which means that only
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
recursive requests from matching clients match that view. The order
of the `` view `` statements is significant; a client request is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
resolved in the context of the first `` view `` that it matches.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Zones defined within a `` view `` statement are only accessible to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
clients that match the `` view `` . By defining a zone of the same name in
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
multiple views, different zone data can be given to different clients:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for example, "internal" and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
Many of the options given in the `` options `` statement can also be used
within a `` view `` statement, and then apply only when resolving queries
with that view. When no view-specific value is given, the value in the
`` options `` statement is used as a default. Also, zone options can have
default values specified in the `` view `` statement; these view-specific
defaults take precedence over those in the `` options `` statement.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Views are class-specific. If no class is given, class IN is assumed.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone, since only the IN
class has compiled-in default hints.
If there are no `` view `` statements in the config file, a default view
that matches any client is automatically created in class IN. Any
`` zone `` statements specified on the top level of the configuration file
are considered to be part of this default view, and the `` options ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
statement applies to the default view. If any explicit `` view ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
statements are present, all `` zone `` statements must occur inside
`` view `` statements.
Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented using
`` view `` statements:
::
view "internal" {
// This should match our internal networks.
match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };
// Provide recursive service to internal
// clients only.
recursion yes;
// Provide a complete view of the example.com
// zone including addresses of internal hosts.
zone "example.com" {
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
type primary;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
file "example-internal.db";
};
};
view "external" {
// Match all clients not matched by the
// previous view.
match-clients { any; };
// Refuse recursive service to external clients.
recursion no;
// Provide a restricted view of the example.com
// zone containing only publicly accessible hosts.
zone "example.com" {
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
type primary;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
file "example-external.db";
};
};
.. _zone_statement_grammar:
`` zone `` Statement Grammar
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. include :: ../misc/master.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/slave.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/mirror.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/hint.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/stub.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/static-stub.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/forward.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/redirect.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/delegation-only.zoneopt.rst
.. include :: ../misc/in-view.zoneopt.rst
.. _zone_statement:
`` zone `` Statement Definition and Usage
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. _zone_types:
Zone Types
^^^^^^^^^^
The `` type `` keyword is required for the `` zone `` configuration unless
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
it is an `` in-view `` configuration. Its acceptable values are:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` primary `` (or `` master `` ), `` secondary `` (or `` slave `` ), `` mirror `` ,
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` hint `` , `` stub `` , `` static-stub `` , `` forward `` , `` redirect `` ,
or `` delegation-only `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` primary ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A primary zone has a master copy of the data for the zone and is able
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to provide authoritative answers for it. Type `` master `` is a synonym
for `` primary `` .
`` secondary ``
A secondary zone is a replica of a primary zone. Type `` slave `` is a
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
synonym for `` secondary `` . The `` primaries `` list specifies one or more IP
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
addresses of primary servers that the secondary contacts to update
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
its copy of the zone. Primaries list elements can
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
also be names of other primaries lists. By default,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
transfers are made from port 53 on the servers;
this can be changed for all servers by specifying
a port number before the list of IP addresses,
or on a per-server basis after the IP address.
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
Authentication to the primary can also be done with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
per-server TSIG keys. If a file is specified, then the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
replica is written to this file
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
whenever the zone
is changed, and reloaded from this file on a server
restart. Use of a file is recommended, since it
often speeds server startup and eliminates a
needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large
numbers (in the tens or hundreds of thousands) of
zones per server, it is best to use a two-level
naming scheme for zone filenames. For example,
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
a secondary server for the zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` example.com `` might place
the zone contents into a file called
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` ex/example.com `` , where
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ex/ `` is just the first two
letters of the zone name. (Most operating systems
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
behave very slowly if there are 100000 files in a single directory.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` mirror ``
A mirror zone is similar to a zone of type `` secondary `` , except its data is
subject to DNSSEC validation before being used in answers. Validation is
applied to the entire zone during the zone transfer process, and again when
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the zone file is loaded from disk upon restarting `` named `` . If validation
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of a new version of a mirror zone fails, a retransfer is scheduled and the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
most recent correctly validated version of that zone is used, until it either
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
expires or a newer version validates correctly. If no usable zone data is
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
available for a mirror zone, either due to transfer failure or
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
expiration, traditional DNS recursion is used to look up the answers instead.
Mirror zones cannot be used in a view that does not have recursion enabled.
Answers coming from a mirror zone look almost exactly like answers from a
zone of type `` secondary `` , with the notable exceptions that the AA bit
("authoritative answer") is not set, and the AD bit ("authenticated data")
is.
Mirror zones are intended to be used to set up a fast local copy of the root
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zone, similar to the one described in :rfc: `7706` . A default list of primary
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
servers for the IANA root zone is built into `` named `` and thus its mirroring
can be enabled using the following configuration:
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
::
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
zone "." {
type mirror;
};
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Mirroring a zone other than root
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
requires an explicit list of primary servers to be provided using the
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
`` primaries `` option (see :ref: `primaries_grammar` for details), and a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
key-signing key (KSK) for the specified zone to be explicitly configured as a
trust anchor.
To make mirror zone contents persist between `` named `` restarts, use the
:ref: `file <file-option>` option.
When configuring NOTIFY for a mirror zone, only `` notify no; `` and `` notify
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
explicit;`` can be used at the zone level; any other ` ` notify ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
setting at the zone level is a configuration error. Using any other
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` notify `` setting at the `` options `` or `` view `` level causes that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
setting to be overridden with `` notify explicit; `` for the mirror zone. The
global default for the `` notify `` option is `` yes `` , so mirror zones are by
default configured with `` notify explicit; `` .
Outgoing transfers of mirror zones are disabled by default but may be
enabled using :ref: `allow-transfer <allow-transfer-access>` .
.. note ::
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Use of this zone type with any zone other than the root should
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
be considered *experimental* and may cause performance issues, especially
for zones which are large and/or frequently updated.
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
`` hint ``
The initial set of root name servers is specified using a hint zone.
When the server starts, it uses the root hints to find a root name
server and get the most recent list of root name servers. If no hint zone
is specified for class IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of
root servers hints. Classes other than IN have no built-in default hints.
`` stub ``
A stub zone is similar to a secondary zone, except that it replicates only
the NS records of a primary zone instead of the entire zone. Stub zones
are not a standard part of the DNS; they are a feature specific to the
BIND implementation.
Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for a glue NS record in a parent
zone, at the expense of maintaining a stub zone entry and a set of name
server addresses in `` named.conf `` . This usage is not recommended for
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
new configurations, and BIND 9 supports it only in a limited way. If a BIND 9
primary, serving a parent zone, has child stub
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
zones configured, all the secondary servers for the parent zone also need to
have the same child stub zones configured.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Stub zones can also be used as a way to force the resolution of a given
2020-06-08 15:33:45 +00:00
domain to use a particular set of authoritative servers. For example, the
caching name servers on a private network using :rfc: `1918` addressing may be
configured with stub zones for `` 10.in-addr.arpa `` to use a set of
internal name servers as the authoritative servers for that domain.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` static-stub ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A static-stub zone is similar to a stub zone, with the following
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
exceptions: the zone data is statically configured, rather than
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
transferred from a primary server; and when recursion is necessary for a query
that matches a static-stub zone, the locally configured data (name server
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
names and glue addresses) is always used, even if different authoritative
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
information is cached.
Zone data is configured via the `` server-addresses `` and `` server-names ``
zone options.
The zone data is maintained in the form of NS and (if necessary) glue A or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
AAAA RRs internally, which can be seen by dumping zone databases with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` rndc dumpdb -all `` . The configured RRs are considered local configuration
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
parameters rather than public data. Non-recursive queries (i.e., those
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
with the RD bit off) to a static-stub zone are therefore prohibited and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are responded to with REFUSED.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Since the data is statically configured, no zone maintenance action takes
place for a static-stub zone. For example, there is no periodic refresh
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
attempt, and an incoming notify message is rejected with an rcode
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of NOTAUTH.
Each static-stub zone is configured with internally generated NS and (if
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
necessary) glue A or AAAA RRs.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` forward ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A forward zone is a way to configure forwarding on a per-domain basis.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
A `` zone `` statement of type `` forward `` can contain a `` forward `` and/or
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` forwarders `` statement, which applies to queries within the domain
given by the zone name. If no `` forwarders `` statement is present, or an
empty list for `` forwarders `` is given, then no forwarding is done
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for the domain, canceling the effects of any forwarders in the `` options ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
statement. Thus, to use this type of zone to change the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
behavior of the global `` forward `` option (that is, "forward first" to,
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
then "forward only", or vice versa), but use the same servers as set
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
globally, re-specify the global forwarders.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` redirect ``
Redirect zones are used to provide answers to queries when normal
resolution would result in NXDOMAIN being returned. Only one redirect zone
is supported per view. `` allow-query `` can be used to restrict which
clients see these answers.
If the client has requested DNSSEC records (DO=1) and the NXDOMAIN response
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is signed, no substitution occurs.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
To redirect all NXDOMAIN responses to 100.100.100.2 and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
2001:ffff:ffff::100.100.100.2, configure a type `` redirect `` zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
named ".", with the zone file containing wildcard records that point to
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
the desired addresses: `` *. IN A 100.100.100.2 `` and
`` *. IN AAAA 2001:ffff:ffff::100.100.100.2 `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
As another example, to redirect all Spanish names (under .ES), use similar entries
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
but with the names `` *.ES. `` instead of `` *. `` . To redirect all commercial
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Spanish names (under COM.ES), use wildcard entries
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
called `` *.COM.ES. `` .
Note that the redirect zone supports all possible types; it is not
limited to A and AAAA records.
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
If a redirect zone is configured with a `` primaries `` option, then it is
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
transferred in as if it were a secondary zone. Otherwise, it is loaded from a
file as if it were a primary zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Because redirect zones are not referenced directly by name, they are not
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
kept in the zone lookup table with normal primary and secondary zones. To reload
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
a redirect zone, use `` rndc reload -redirect `` ; to retransfer a
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
redirect zone configured as a secondary, use `` rndc retransfer -redirect `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
When using `` rndc reload `` without specifying a zone name, redirect
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
zones are reloaded along with other zones.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` delegation-only ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This zone type is used to enforce the delegation-only status of infrastructure
zones (e.g., COM, NET, ORG). Any answer that is received without an
explicit or implicit delegation in the authority section is treated
as NXDOMAIN. This does not apply to the zone apex, and should not be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
applied to leaf zones.
`` delegation-only `` has no effect on answers received from forwarders.
See caveats in :ref: `root-delegation-only <root-delegation-only>` .
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` in-view ``
When using multiple views, a `` primary `` or `` secondary `` zone configured
in one view can be referenced in a subsequent view. This allows both views
to use the same zone without the overhead of loading it more than once. This
is configured using a `` zone `` statement, with an `` in-view `` option
specifying the view in which the zone is defined. A `` zone `` statement
containing `` in-view `` does not need to specify a type, since that is part
of the zone definition in the other view.
See :ref: `multiple_views` for more information.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Class
^^^^^
The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If a class is not
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
specified, class `` IN `` (for `` Internet `` ) is assumed. This is correct
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
for the vast majority of cases.
The `` hesiod `` class is named for an information service from MIT's
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Project Athena. It was used to share information about various systems
databases, such as users, groups, printers, and so on. The keyword `` HS ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is a synonym for hesiod.
Another MIT development is Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created in the
mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the `` CHAOS `` class.
.. _zone_options:
Zone Options
^^^^^^^^^^^^
`` allow-notify ``
See the description of `` allow-notify `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` allow-query ``
See the description of `` allow-query `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` allow-query-on ``
See the description of `` allow-query-on `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` allow-transfer ``
See the description of `` allow-transfer `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` allow-update ``
See the description of `` allow-update `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` update-policy ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See :ref: `dynamic_update_policies` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` allow-update-forwarding ``
See the description of `` allow-update-forwarding `` in :ref: `access_control` .
`` also-notify ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option is only meaningful if `` notify `` is active for this zone. The set of
machines that receive a `` DNS NOTIFY `` message for this zone is
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
made up of all the listed name servers (other than the primary)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
for the zone, plus any IP addresses specified with
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` also-notify `` . A port may be specified with each `` also-notify ``
address to send the notify messages to a port other than the default
of 53. A TSIG key may also be specified to cause the `` NOTIFY `` to be
signed by the given key. `` also-notify `` is not meaningful for stub
zones. The default is the empty list.
`` check-names ``
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
certain domain names in primary files and/or DNS responses received
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
from the network. The default varies according to zone type. For
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` primary `` zones the default is `` fail `` ; for `` secondary `` zones the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
default is `` warn `` . It is not implemented for `` hint `` zones.
`` check-mx ``
See the description of `` check-mx `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` check-spf ``
See the description of `` check-spf `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` check-wildcard ``
See the description of `` check-wildcard `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` check-integrity ``
See the description of `` check-integrity `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` check-sibling ``
See the description of `` check-sibling `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` zero-no-soa-ttl ``
See the description of `` zero-no-soa-ttl `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` update-check-ksk ``
See the description of `` update-check-ksk `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` dnssec-loadkeys-interval ``
See the description of `` dnssec-loadkeys-interval `` in :ref: `options` .
`` dnssec-update-mode ``
See the description of `` dnssec-update-mode `` in :ref: `options` .
`` dnssec-dnskey-kskonly ``
See the description of `` dnssec-dnskey-kskonly `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` try-tcp-refresh ``
See the description of `` try-tcp-refresh `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` database ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This specifies the type of database to be used to store the zone data.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The string following the `` database `` keyword is interpreted as a
list of whitespace-delimited words. The first word identifies the
database type, and any subsequent words are passed as arguments to
the database to be interpreted in a way specific to the database
type.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The default is `` rbt `` , BIND 9's native in-memory red-black tree
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
database. This database does not take arguments.
Other values are possible if additional database drivers have been
linked into the server. Some sample drivers are included with the
distribution but none are linked in by default.
`` dialup ``
See the description of `` dialup `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` delegation-only ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This flag only applies to forward, hint, and stub zones. If set to
`` yes `` , then the zone is treated as if it is also a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
delegation-only type zone.
See caveats in :ref: `root-delegation-only <root-delegation-only>` .
.. _file-option:
`` file ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This sets the zone's filename. In `` primary `` , `` hint `` , and `` redirect ``
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
zones which do not have `` primaries `` defined, zone data is loaded from
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
this file. In `` secondary `` , `` mirror `` , `` stub `` , and `` redirect `` zones
2020-06-17 02:02:27 -07:00
which do have `` primaries `` defined, zone data is retrieved from
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
another server and saved in this file. This option is not applicable
to other zone types.
`` forward ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option is only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders list. The `` only `` value
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
causes the lookup to fail after trying the forwarders and getting no
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
answer, while `` first `` allows a normal lookup to be tried.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` forwarders ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is used to override the list of global forwarders. If it is not
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specified in a zone of type `` forward `` , no forwarding is done for
the zone and the global options are not used.
`` journal ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This allows the default journal's filename to be overridden. The default is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
the zone's filename with "`` .jnl `` " appended. This is applicable to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` primary `` and `` secondary `` zones.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` max-ixfr-ratio ``
See the description of `` max-ixfr-ratio `` in :ref: `options` .
`` max-journal-size ``
See the description of `` max-journal-size `` in :ref: `server_resource_limits` .
`` max-records ``
See the description of `` max-records `` in :ref: `server_resource_limits` .
`` max-transfer-time-in ``
See the description of `` max-transfer-time-in `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` max-transfer-idle-in ``
See the description of `` max-transfer-idle-in `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` max-transfer-time-out ``
See the description of `` max-transfer-time-out `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` max-transfer-idle-out ``
See the description of `` max-transfer-idle-out `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` notify ``
See the description of `` notify `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` notify-delay ``
See the description of `` notify-delay `` in :ref: `tuning` .
`` notify-to-soa ``
See the description of `` notify-to-soa `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` zone-statistics ``
See the description of `` zone-statistics `` in :ref: `options` .
`` server-addresses ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This option is only meaningful for static-stub zones. This is a list of IP addresses
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to which queries should be sent in recursive resolution for the zone.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A non-empty list for this option internally configures the apex
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
NS RR with associated glue A or AAAA RRs.
For example, if "example.com" is configured as a static-stub zone
with 192.0.2.1 and 2001:db8::1234 in a `` server-addresses `` option,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the following RRs are internally configured:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
example.com. NS example.com.
example.com. A 192.0.2.1
example.com. AAAA 2001:db8::1234
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
These records are used internally to resolve names under the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
static-stub zone. For instance, if the server receives a query for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
"www.example.com" with the RD bit on, the server initiates
recursive resolution and sends queries to 192.0.2.1 and/or
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2001:db8::1234.
`` server-names ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This option is only meaningful for static-stub zones. This is a list of domain names
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
of name servers that act as authoritative servers of the static-stub
zone. These names are resolved to IP addresses when `` named ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
needs to send queries to these servers. For this supplemental
resolution to be successful, these names must not be a subdomain of the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
origin name of the static-stub zone. That is, when "example.net" is the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
origin of a static-stub zone, "ns.example" and "master.example.com"
can be specified in the `` server-names `` option, but "ns.example.net"
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
cannot; it is rejected by the configuration parser.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
A non-empty list for this option internally configures the apex
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
NS RR with the specified names. For example, if "example.com" is
configured as a static-stub zone with "ns1.example.net" and
"ns2.example.net" in a `` server-names `` option, the following RRs
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
are internally configured:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
example.com. NS ns1.example.net.
example.com. NS ns2.example.net.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
These records are used internally to resolve names under the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
static-stub zone. For instance, if the server receives a query for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
"www.example.com" with the RD bit on, the server initiates recursive
resolution, resolves "ns1.example.net" and/or "ns2.example.net" to IP
addresses, and then sends queries to one or more of these addresses.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` sig-validity-interval ``
See the description of `` sig-validity-interval `` in :ref: `tuning` .
`` sig-signing-nodes ``
See the description of `` sig-signing-nodes `` in :ref: `tuning` .
`` sig-signing-signatures ``
See the description of `` sig-signing-signatures `` in
:ref: `tuning` .
`` sig-signing-type ``
See the description of `` sig-signing-type `` in :ref: `tuning` .
`` transfer-source ``
See the description of `` transfer-source `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` transfer-source-v6 ``
See the description of `` transfer-source-v6 `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` alt-transfer-source ``
See the description of `` alt-transfer-source `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` alt-transfer-source-v6 ``
See the description of `` alt-transfer-source-v6 `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` use-alt-transfer-source ``
See the description of `` use-alt-transfer-source `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` notify-source ``
See the description of `` notify-source `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
`` notify-source-v6 ``
See the description of `` notify-source-v6 `` in :ref: `zone_transfers` .
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` min-refresh-time `` ; `` max-refresh-time `` ; `` min-retry-time `` ; `` max-retry-time ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
See the descriptions in :ref: `tuning` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ixfr-from-differences ``
See the description of `` ixfr-from-differences `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
(Note that the `` ixfr-from-differences `` choices of `` primary `` and `` secondary ``
are not available at the zone level.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` key-directory ``
See the description of `` key-directory `` in :ref: `options` .
`` auto-dnssec ``
See the description of `` auto-dnssec `` in :ref: `options` .
`` serial-update-method ``
See the description of `` serial-update-method `` in :ref: `options` .
`` inline-signing ``
If `` yes `` , this enables "bump in the wire" signing of a zone, where
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
an unsigned zone is transferred in or loaded from disk and a signed
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
version of the zone is served with, possibly, a different serial
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
number. This behavior is disabled by default.
`` multi-master ``
See the description of `` multi-master `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
`` masterfile-format ``
See the description of `` masterfile-format `` in :ref: `tuning` .
`` max-zone-ttl ``
See the description of `` max-zone-ttl `` in :ref: `options` .
`` dnssec-secure-to-insecure ``
See the description of `` dnssec-secure-to-insecure `` in :ref: `boolean_options` .
.. _dynamic_update_policies:
Dynamic Update Policies
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
BIND 9 supports two methods of granting clients the right to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
perform dynamic updates to a zone, configured by the `` allow-update ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
or `` update-policy `` options.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` allow-update `` clause is a simple access control list. Any client
that matches the ACL is granted permission to update any record in the
zone.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` update-policy `` clause allows more fine-grained control over which
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
updates are allowed. It specifies a set of rules, in which each rule
either grants or denies permission for one or more names in the zone to
be updated by one or more identities. Identity is determined by the key
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
that signed the update request, using either TSIG or SIG(0). In most
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
cases, `` update-policy `` rules only apply to key-based identities. There
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is no way to specify update permissions based on the client source address.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` update-policy `` rules are only meaningful for zones of type
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` primary `` , and are not allowed in any other zone type. It is a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
configuration error to specify both `` allow-update `` and
`` update-policy `` at the same time.
A pre-defined `` update-policy `` rule can be switched on with the command
2020-06-04 18:06:11 +00:00
`` update-policy local; `` . `` named `` automatically
generates a TSIG session key when starting and stores it in a file;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
this key can then be used by local clients to update the zone while
`` named `` is running. By default, the session key is stored in the file
`` /var/run/named/session.key `` , the key name is "local-ddns", and the
key algorithm is HMAC-SHA256. These values are configurable with the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` session-keyfile `` , `` session-keyname `` , and `` session-keyalg `` options,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
respectively. A client running on the local system, if run with
appropriate permissions, may read the session key from the key file and
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
use it to sign update requests. The zone's update policy is set to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
allow that key to change any record within the zone. Assuming the key
name is "local-ddns", this policy is equivalent to:
::
update-policy { grant local-ddns zonesub any; };
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
with the additional restriction that only clients connecting from the
local system are permitted to send updates.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Note that only one session key is generated by `` named `` ; all zones
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configured to use `` update-policy local `` accept the same key.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The command `` nsupdate -l `` implements this feature, sending requests to
localhost and signing them using the key retrieved from the session key
file.
Other rule definitions look like this:
::
( grant | deny ) identity ruletype name types
Each rule grants or denies privileges. Rules are checked in the order in
which they are specified in the `` update-policy `` statement. Once a
message has successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately
granted or denied, and no further rules are examined. There are 13 types
of rules; the rule type is specified by the `` ruletype `` field, and the
interpretation of other fields varies depending on the rule type.
In general, a rule is matched when the key that signed an update request
matches the `` identity `` field, the name of the record to be updated
matches the `` name `` field (in the manner specified by the `` ruletype ``
field), and the type of the record to be updated matches the `` types ``
field. Details for each rule type are described below.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` identity `` field must be set to a fully qualified domain name. In
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
most cases, this represents the name of the TSIG or SIG(0) key that
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
must be used to sign the update request. If the specified name is a
wildcard, it is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and the rule may
apply to multiple identities. When a TKEY exchange has been used to
create a shared secret, the identity of the key used to authenticate the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
TKEY exchange is used as the identity of the shared secret. Some
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
rule types use identities matching the client's Kerberos principal (e.g,
`` "host/machine@REALM" `` ) or Windows realm (`` machine$@REALM `` ).
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The `` name `` field also specifies a fully qualified domain name. This often
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
represents the name of the record to be updated. Interpretation of this
field is dependent on rule type.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
If no `` types `` are explicitly specified, then a rule matches all types
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
except RRSIG, NS, SOA, NSEC, and NSEC3. Types may be specified by name,
including `` ANY `` ; ANY matches all types except NSEC and NSEC3, which can
never be updated. Note that when an attempt is made to delete all
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
records associated with a name, the rules are checked for each existing
record type.
2020-02-13 14:53:20 +11:00
If the type is immediately followed by a number in parentheses,
that number is the maximum number of records of that type permitted
to exist in the RRset after an update has been applied. For example,
`` PTR(1) `` indicates that only one PTR record is allowed. If an
attempt is made to add two PTR records in an update, the second one
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is silently discarded. If a PTR record already exists, both
new records are silently discarded.
2020-02-13 14:53:20 +11:00
If type ANY is specified with a limit, then that limit applies to
all types that are not otherwise specified. For example, `` A PTR(1)
ANY(2)`` indicates that an unlimited number of A records can exist,
but only one PTR record, and no more than two of any other type.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Typical use with a rule `` grant * tcp-self . PTR(1); `` in the zone
2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA looks like this:
::
2020-02-13 14:53:20 +11:00
nsupdate -v <<EOF
local 192.0.2.1
del 1.2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA PTR
add 1.2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA 0 PTR EXAMPLE.COM
send
EOF
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The ruletype field has 16 values: `` name `` , `` subdomain `` , `` zonesub `` , `` wildcard `` ,
`` self `` , `` selfsub `` , `` selfwild `` , `` ms-self `` , `` ms-selfsub `` , `` ms-subdomain `` ,
`` krb5-self `` , `` krb5-selfsub `` , `` krb5-subdomain `` ,
`` tcp-self `` , `` 6to4-self `` , and `` external `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` name ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
With exact-match semantics, this rule matches when the name being updated is identical to the contents of the `` name `` field.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` subdomain ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This rule matches when the name being updated is a subdomain of, or identical to, the contents of the `` name `` field.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` zonesub ``
This rule is similar to subdomain, except that it matches when the name being updated is a subdomain of the zone in which the `` update-policy `` statement appears. This obviates the need to type the zone name twice, and enables the use of a standard `` update-policy `` statement in multiple zones without modification.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
When this rule is used, the `` name `` field is omitted.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` wildcard ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The `` name `` field is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and this rule matches when the name being updated is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` self ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This rule matches when the name of the record being updated matches the contents of the `` identity `` field. The `` name `` field is ignored. To avoid confusion, it is recommended that this field be set to the same value as the `` identity `` field or to "."
The `` self `` rule type is most useful when allowing one key per name to update, where the key has the same name as the record to be updated. In this case, the `` identity `` field can be specified as `` * `` (asterisk).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` selfsub ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This rule is similar to `` self `` , except that subdomains of `` self `` can also be updated.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` selfwild ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This rule is similar to `` self `` , except that only subdomains of `` self `` can be updated.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ms-self ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When a client sends an UPDATE using a Windows machine principal (for example, `` machine$@REALM `` ), this rule allows records with the absolute name of `` machine.REALM `` to be updated.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The realm to be matched is specified in the `` identity `` field.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The `` name `` field has no effect on this rule; it should be set to "." as a placeholder.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
For example, `` grant EXAMPLE.COM ms-self . A AAAA `` allows any machine with a valid principal in the realm `` EXAMPLE.COM `` to update its own address records.
`` ms-selfsub ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is similar to `` ms-self `` , except it also allows updates to any subdomain of the name specified in the Windows machine principal, not just to the name itself.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` ms-subdomain ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
When a client sends an UPDATE using a Windows machine principal (for example, `` machine$@REALM `` ), this rule allows any machine in the specified realm to update any record in the zone or in a specified subdomain of the zone.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The realm to be matched is specified in the `` identity `` field.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The `` name `` field specifies the subdomain that may be updated. If set to "." or any other name at or above the zone apex, any name in the zone can be updated.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
For example, if `` update-policy `` for the zone "example.com" includes `` grant EXAMPLE.COM ms-subdomain hosts.example.com. AA AAAA `` , any machine with a valid principal in the realm `` EXAMPLE.COM `` is able to update address records at or below `` hosts.example.com `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` krb5-self ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
When a client sends an UPDATE using a Kerberos machine principal (for example, `` host/machine@REALM `` ), this rule allows records with the absolute name of `` machine `` to be updated, provided it has been authenticated by REALM. This is similar but not identical to `` ms-self `` , due to the `` machine `` part of the Kerberos principal being an absolute name instead of an unqualified name.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The realm to be matched is specified in the `` identity `` field.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The `` name `` field has no effect on this rule; it should be set to "." as a placeholder.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
For example, `` grant EXAMPLE.COM krb5-self . A AAAA `` allows any machine with a valid principal in the realm `` EXAMPLE.COM `` to update its own address records.
`` krb5-selfsub ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This is similar to `` krb5-self `` , except it also allows updates to any subdomain of the name specified in the `` machine `` part of the Kerberos principal, not just to the name itself.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` krb5-subdomain ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This rule is identical to `` ms-subdomain `` , except that it works with Kerberos machine principals (i.e., `` host/machine@REALM `` ) rather than Windows machine principals.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` tcp-self ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This rule allows updates that have been sent via TCP and for which the standard mapping from the client's IP address into the `` in-addr.arpa `` and `` ip6.arpa `` namespaces matches the name to be updated. The `` identity `` field must match that name. The `` name `` field should be set to ".". Note that, since identity is based on the client's IP address, it is not necessary for update request messages to be signed.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. note ::
It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP sessions.
`` 6to4-self ``
This allows the name matching a 6to4 IPv6 prefix, as specified in :rfc: `3056` , to be updated by any TCP connection from either the 6to4 network or from the corresponding IPv4 address. This is intended to allow NS or DNAME RRsets to be added to the `` ip6.arpa `` reverse tree.
The `` identity `` field must match the 6to4 prefix in `` ip6.arpa `` . The `` name `` field should be set to ".". Note that, since identity is based on the client's IP address, it is not necessary for update request messages to be signed.
In addition, if specified for an `` ip6.arpa `` name outside of the `` 2.0.0.2.ip6.arpa `` namespace, the corresponding /48 reverse name can be updated. For example, TCP/IPv6 connections from 2001:DB8:ED0C::/48 can update records at `` C.0.D.E.8.B.D.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa `` .
.. note ::
It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP sessions.
`` external ``
This rule allows `` named `` to defer the decision of whether to allow a given update to an external daemon.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The method of communicating with the daemon is specified in the `` identity `` field, the format of which is "`` local: ` ` \ path", where "path" is the location of a Unix-domain socket. (Currently, "local" is the only supported mechanism.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Requests to the external daemon are sent over the Unix-domain socket as datagrams with the following format:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
Protocol version number (4 bytes, network byte order, currently 1)
Request length (4 bytes, network byte order)
Signer (null-terminated string)
Name (null-terminated string)
TCP source address (null-terminated string)
Rdata type (null-terminated string)
Key (null-terminated string)
TKEY token length (4 bytes, network byte order)
TKEY token (remainder of packet)
The daemon replies with a four-byte value in network byte order, containing either 0 or 1; 0 indicates that the specified update is not permitted, and 1 indicates that it is.
.. _multiple_views:
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Multiple Views
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When multiple views are in use, a zone may be referenced by more than
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
one of them. Often, the views contain different zones with the same
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
name, allowing different clients to receive different answers for the
same queries. At times, however, it is desirable for multiple views to
contain identical zones. The `` in-view `` zone option provides an
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
efficient way to do this; it allows a view to reference a zone that was
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
defined in a previously configured view. For example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
view internal {
match-clients { 10/8; };
zone example.com {
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
type primary;
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
file "example-external.db";
};
};
view external {
match-clients { any; };
zone example.com {
in-view internal;
};
};
An `` in-view `` option cannot refer to a view that is configured later in
the configuration file.
A `` zone `` statement which uses the `` in-view `` option may not use any
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
other options, with the exception of `` forward `` and `` forwarders `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
(These options control the behavior of the containing view, rather than
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
change the zone object itself.)
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Zone-level ACLs (e.g., allow-query, allow-transfer), and other
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
configuration details of the zone, are all set in the view the referenced
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
zone is defined in. Be careful to ensure that ACLs are wide
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
enough for all views referencing the zone.
An `` in-view `` zone cannot be used as a response policy zone.
An `` in-view `` zone is not intended to reference a `` forward `` zone.
.. _zone_file:
Zone File
---------
.. _types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them:
Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This section, largely borrowed from :rfc: `1034` , describes the concept of a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Resource Record (RR) and explains when each type is used. Since the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
publication of :rfc: `1034` , several new RRs have been identified and
implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
Resource Records
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
A domain name identifies a node. Each node has a set of resource
information, which may be empty. The set of resource information
associated with a particular name is composed of separate RRs. The order
of RRs in a set is not significant and need not be preserved by name
servers, resolvers, or other parts of the DNS. However, sorting of
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
multiple RRs is permitted for optimization purposes: for example, to
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
specify that a particular nearby server be tried first. See
:ref: `the_sortlist_statement` and :ref: `rrset_ordering` .
The components of a Resource Record are:
owner name
The domain name where the RR is found.
type
An encoded 16-bit value that specifies the type of the resource record.
TTL
The time-to-live of the RR. This field is a 32-bit integer in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it should be discarded.
class
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
An encoded 16-bit value that identifies a protocol family or an instance of a protocol.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
RDATA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The resource data. The format of the data is type- and sometimes class-specific.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
For a complete list of *types* of valid RRs, including those that have been obsoleted, please refer to https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_DNS_record_types.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The following *classes* of resource records are currently valid in the
DNS:
IN
The Internet.
CH
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the mid-1970s. It was rarely used for its historical purpose, but was reused for BIND's built-in server information zones, e.g., `` version.bind `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
HS
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Hesiod, an information service developed by MIT's Project Athena. It was used to share information about various systems databases, such as users, groups, printers, etc.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an integral part
of the RR. For example, many name servers internally form tree or hash
structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes. The remaining RR
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL), which is consistent for
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA) that fits the needs of the resource
being described.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The TTL field is a time limit on how long an RR can be
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
kept in a cache. This limit does not apply to authoritative data in
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
zones; that also times out, but follows the refreshing policies for the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
zone. The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the zone where the
data originates. While short TTLs can be used to minimize caching, and a
zero TTL prohibits caching, the realities of Internet performance
suggest that these times should be on the order of days for the typical
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
host. If a change is anticipated, the TTL can be reduced prior to
the change to minimize inconsistency, and then
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
increased back to its former value following the change.
The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination of
binary strings and domain names. The domain names are frequently used as
"pointers" to other data in the DNS.
.. _rr_text:
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Textual Expression of RRs
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS protocol,
and are usually represented in highly encoded form when stored in a name
server or resolver. In the examples provided in :rfc: `1034` , a style
2020-05-13 21:22:34 +00:00
similar to that used in primary files was employed in order to show the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
contents of RRs. In this format, most RRs are shown on a single line,
although continuation lines are possible using parentheses.
The start of the line gives the owner of the RR. If a line begins with a
blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as that of the previous
RR. Blank lines are often included for readability.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Following the owner are listed the TTL, type, and class of the RR. Class
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is an integer before
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the type field. To avoid ambiguity in parsing, type and class
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are integers, and the type mnemonic is
always last. The IN class and TTL values are often omitted from examples
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
in the interest of clarity.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The resource data or RDATA section of the RR is given using knowledge
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
of the typical representation for the data.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
For example, the RRs carried in a message might be shown as:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| `` ISI.EDU. `` | `` MX `` | `` 10 VENERA.ISI.EDU. `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| | `` MX `` | `` 10 VAXA.ISI.EDU `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| `` VENERA.ISI.EDU `` | `` A `` | `` 128.9.0.32 `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| | `` A `` | `` 10.1.0.52 `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| `` VAXA.ISI.EDU `` | `` A `` | `` 10.2.0.27 `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
| | `` A `` | `` 128.9.0.33 `` |
+---------------------+---------------+--------------------------------+
The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16-bit number
followed by a domain name. The address RRs use a standard IP address
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
format to contain a 32-bit Internet address.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The above example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three domain
names.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Here is another possible example:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
+----------------------+---------------+-------------------------------+
| `` XX.LCS.MIT.EDU. `` | `` IN A `` | `` 10.0.0.44 `` |
+----------------------+---------------+-------------------------------+
| | `` CH A `` | `` MIT.EDU. 2420 `` |
+----------------------+---------------+-------------------------------+
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This shows two addresses for `` XX.LCS.MIT.EDU `` , each of a
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
different class.
.. _mx_records:
Discussion of MX Records
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As described above, domain servers store information as a series of
resource records, each of which contains a particular piece of
information about a given domain name (which is usually, but not always,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
a host). The simplest way to think of an RR is as a typed pair of data, a
domain name matched with a relevant datum and stored with some
additional type information, to help systems determine when the RR is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
relevant.
MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data specified in
the record is a priority and a domain name. The priority controls the
order in which email delivery is attempted, with the lowest number
first. If two priorities are the same, a server is chosen randomly. If
no servers at a given priority are responding, the mail transport agent
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
falls back to the next largest priority. Priority numbers do not
have any absolute meaning; they are relevant only respective to other
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
MX records for that domain name. The domain name given is the machine to
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
which the mail is delivered. It *must* have an associated address
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
record (A or AAAA); CNAME is not sufficient.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an MX record,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
the MX record is in error and is ignored. Instead, the mail is
delivered to the server specified in the MX record pointed to by the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
CNAME. For example:
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
| `` example.com. `` | `` IN `` | `` MX `` | `` 10 `` | `` mail.example.com. `` |
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
| | `` IN `` | `` MX `` | `` 10 `` | `` mail2.example.com. `` |
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
| | `` IN `` | `` MX `` | `` 20 `` | `` mail.backup.org. `` |
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
| `` mail.example.com. `` | `` IN `` | `` A `` | `` 10.0.0.1 `` | |
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
| `` mail2.example.com. `` | `` IN `` | `` A `` | `` 10.0.0.2 `` | |
+------------------------+--------+--------+--------------+------------------------+
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Mail delivery is attempted to `` mail.example.com `` and
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` mail2.example.com `` (in any order); if neither of those succeeds,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
delivery to `` mail.backup.org `` is attempted.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _Setting_TTLs:
Setting TTLs
~~~~~~~~~~~~
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
The time-to-live (TTL) of the RR field is a 32-bit integer represented in
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they cache
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
RRs. The TTL describes how long an RR can be cached before it should be
discarded. The following three types of TTLs are currently used in a zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
file.
SOA
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The last field in the SOA is the negative caching TTL. This controls how long other servers cache no-such-domain (NXDOMAIN) responses from this server.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The maximum time for negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
$TTL
The $TTL directive at the top of the zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every RR without a specific TTL set.
RR TTLs
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Each RR can have a TTL as the second field in the RR, which controls how long other servers can cache it.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units can be
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
explicitly specified: for example, `` 1h30m `` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _ipv4_reverse:
Inverse Mapping in IPv4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address to name)
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is achieved by means of the `` in-addr.arpa `` domain and PTR records.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in least-to-most significant
order, read left to right. This is the opposite order to the way IP
addresses are usually written. Thus, a machine with an IP address of
10.1.2.3 would have a corresponding in-addr.arpa name of
3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record whose
data field is the name of the machine or, optionally, multiple PTR
records if the machine has more than one name. For example, in the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` example.com `` domain:
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
+--------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
| `` $ORIGIN `` | `` 2.1.10.in-addr.arpa `` |
+--------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
| `` 3 `` | `` IN PTR foo.example.com. `` |
+--------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
.. note ::
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The `` $ORIGIN `` line in this example is only to provide context;
it does not necessarily appear in the actual
usage. It is only used here to indicate that the example is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
relative to the listed origin.
.. _zone_directives:
Other Zone File Directives
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2020-06-15 14:37:56 +00:00
The DNS "master file" format was initially defined in :rfc: `1035` and has
subsequently been extended. While the format itself is class-independent,
all records in a zone file must be of the same class.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-06-15 14:37:56 +00:00
Master file directives include `` $ORIGIN `` , `` $INCLUDE `` , and `` $TTL. ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _atsign:
The `` @ `` (at-sign)
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When used in the label (or name) field, the asperand or at-sign (@)
symbol represents the current origin. At the start of the zone file, it
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
is the <`` zone_name `` >, followed by a trailing dot (.).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _origin_directive:
The `` $ORIGIN `` Directive
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Syntax: `` $ORIGIN `` domain-name [comment]
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` $ORIGIN `` sets the domain name that is appended to any
unqualified records. When a zone is first read, there is an implicit
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
`` $ORIGIN `` <`` zone_name `` >`` . `` ; note the trailing dot. The
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
current `` $ORIGIN `` is appended to the domain specified in the
`` $ORIGIN `` argument if it is not absolute.
::
$ORIGIN example.com.
WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVER
is equivalent to
::
WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
.. _include_directive:
The `` $INCLUDE `` Directive
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Syntax: `` $INCLUDE `` filename [origin] [comment]
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This reads and processes the file `` filename `` as if it were included in the
file at this point. If `` origin `` is specified, the file is processed
with `` $ORIGIN `` set to that value; otherwise, the current `` $ORIGIN `` is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
used.
The origin and the current domain name revert to the values they had
prior to the `` $INCLUDE `` once the file has been read.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
.. note ::
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
:rfc: `1035` specifies that the current origin should be restored after
an `` $INCLUDE `` , but it is silent on whether the current domain name
should also be restored. BIND 9 restores both of them. This could be
construed as a deviation from :rfc: `1035` , a feature, or both.
.. _ttl_directive:
The `` $TTL `` Directive
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Syntax: `` $TTL `` default-ttl [comment]
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This sets the default Time-To-Live (TTL) for subsequent records with undefined
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
TTLs. Valid TTLs are of the range 0-2147483647 seconds.
`` $TTL `` is defined in :rfc: `2308` .
.. _generate_directive:
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
BIND Primary File Extension: the `` $GENERATE `` Directive
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Syntax: `` $GENERATE `` range lhs [ttl] [class] type rhs [comment]
`` $GENERATE `` is used to create a series of resource records that only
differ from each other by an iterator. `` $GENERATE `` can be used to
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
easily generate the sets of records required to support sub-/24 reverse
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
delegations described in :rfc: `2317` .
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
::
$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
$GENERATE 1-2 @ NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0
is equivalent to
::
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
...
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Both generate a set of A and MX records. Note the MX's right-hand side is a
quoted string. The quotes are stripped when the right-hand side is
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
processed.
::
$ORIGIN EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 HOST-$ A 1.2.3.$
$GENERATE 1-127 HOST-$ MX "0 ."
is equivalent to
::
HOST-1.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.1
HOST-1.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
HOST-2.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.2
HOST-2.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
HOST-3.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.3
HOST-3.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
...
HOST-127.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.127
HOST-127.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
`` range ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This can be one of two forms: start-stop or start-stop/step. If the first form is used, then step is set to 1. "start", "stop", and "step" must be positive integers between 0 and (2^31)-1. "start" must not be larger than "stop".
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` owner ``
This describes the owner name of the resource records to be created. Any single `` $ `` (dollar sign) symbols within the `` owner `` string are replaced by the iterator value. To get a `` $ `` in the output, escape the `` $ `` using a backslash `` \ `` , e.g., `` \$ `` . The `` $ `` may optionally be followed by modifiers which change the offset from the iterator, field width, and base.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
Modifiers are introduced by a `` { `` (left brace) immediately following the `` $ `` , as in `` ${offset[,width[,base]]} `` . For example, `` ${-20,3,d} `` subtracts 20 from the current value and prints the result as a decimal in a zero-padded field of width 3. Available output forms are decimal (`` d `` ), octal (`` o `` ), hexadecimal (`` x `` or `` X `` for uppercase), and nibble (`` n `` or `` N `` for uppercase).
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The default modifier is `` ${0,0,d} `` . If the `` owner `` is not absolute, the current `` $ORIGIN `` is appended to the name.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
In nibble mode, the value is treated as if it were a reversed hexadecimal string, with each hexadecimal digit as a separate label. The width field includes the label separator.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
For compatibility with earlier versions, `` $$ `` is still recognized as indicating a literal $ in the output.
`` ttl ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the time-to-live of the generated records. If not specified, this is inherited using the normal TTL inheritance rules.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` class `` and `` ttl `` can be entered in either order.
`` class ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This specifies the class of the generated records. This must match the zone class if it is specified.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` class `` and `` ttl `` can be entered in either order.
`` type ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
This can be any valid type.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` rdata ``
This is a string containing the RDATA of the resource record to be created. It may be quoted if there are spaces in the string; the quotation marks do not appear in the generated record.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The `` $GENERATE `` directive is a BIND extension and not part of the
standard zone file format.
.. _zonefile_format:
Additional File Formats
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
In addition to the standard text format, BIND 9 supports the ability
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
to read or dump to zone files in other formats.
The `` raw `` format is a binary representation of zone data in a manner
similar to that used in zone transfers. Since it does not require
parsing text, load time is significantly reduced.
An even faster alternative is the `` map `` format, which is an image of a
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
BIND 9 in-memory zone database; it can be loaded directly
into memory via the `` mmap() `` function and the zone can begin serving
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
queries almost immediately.
For a primary server, a zone file in `` raw `` or `` map `` format is
expected to be generated from a textual zone file by the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` named-compilezone `` command. For a secondary server or a dynamic
zone, the zone file is automatically generated when `` named `` dumps the zone contents
after zone transfer or when applying prior updates, if one of these
formats is specified by the `` masterfile-format `` option.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
If a zone file in a binary format needs manual modification, it first
must be converted to a textual form by the `` named-compilezone ``
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
command. Make any necessary modifications to the text file, and
then convert it to the binary form via the `` named-compilezone ``
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
command again.
Note that `` map `` format is extremely architecture-specific. A `` map ``
file *cannot* be used on a system with different pointer size,
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
endianness, or data alignment than the system on which it was generated,
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
and should in general be used only inside a single system. While `` raw ``
format uses network byte order and avoids architecture-dependent data
alignment so that it is as portable as possible, it is also primarily
expected to be used inside the same single system. To export a zone file
in either `` raw `` or `` map `` format, or make a portable backup of such a
file, conversion to `` text `` format is recommended.
.. _statistics:
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
BIND 9 Statistics
2020-06-29 19:39:03 +02:00
-----------------
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
BIND 9 maintains lots of statistics information and provides several
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
interfaces for users to access those statistics. The available
statistics include all statistics counters that are meaningful in BIND 9,
and other information that is considered useful.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The statistics information is categorized into the following sections:
Incoming Requests
The number of incoming DNS requests for each OPCODE.
Incoming Queries
The number of incoming queries for each RR type.
Outgoing Queries
The number of outgoing queries for each RR type sent from the internal
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
resolver, maintained per view.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Name Server Statistics
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Statistics counters for incoming request processing.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Zone Maintenance Statistics
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Statistics counters regarding zone maintenance operations, such as zone
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
transfers.
Resolver Statistics
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Statistics counters for name resolutions performed in the internal resolver,
maintained per view.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
Cache DB RRsets
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Statistics counters related to cache contents, maintained per view.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
The "NXDOMAIN" counter is the number of names that have been cached as
nonexistent. Counters named for RR types indicate the number of active
RRsets for each type in the cache database.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
If an RR type name is preceded by an exclamation point (!), it represents the
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
number of records in the cache which indicate that the type does not exist
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
for a particular name; this is also known as "NXRRSET". If an RR type name
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
is preceded by a hash mark (#), it represents the number of RRsets for this
type that are present in the cache but whose TTLs have expired; these RRsets
may only be used if stale answers are enabled. If an RR type name is
preceded by a tilde (~), it represents the number of RRsets for this type
that are present in the cache database but are marked for garbage collection;
these RRsets cannot be used.
Socket I/O Statistics
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Statistics counters for network-related events.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
A subset of Name Server Statistics is collected and shown per zone for
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
which the server has the authority, when `` zone-statistics `` is set to
`` full `` (or `` yes `` ), for backward compatibility. See the description of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` zone-statistics `` in :ref: `options` for further details.
These statistics counters are shown with their zone and view names. The
view name is omitted when the server is not configured with explicit
views.
There are currently two user interfaces to get access to the statistics.
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
One is in plain-text format, dumped to the file specified by the
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` statistics-file `` configuration option; the other is remotely
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
accessible via a statistics channel when the `` statistics-channels ``
statement is specified in the configuration file (see :ref: `statschannels` .)
.. _statsfile:
The Statistics File
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The text format statistics dump begins with a line, like:
`` +++ Statistics Dump +++ (973798949) ``
The number in parentheses is a standard Unix-style timestamp, measured
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
in seconds since January 1, 1970. Following that line is a set of
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
statistics information, which is categorized as described above. Each
section begins with a line, like:
`` ++ Name Server Statistics ++ ``
Each section consists of lines, each containing the statistics counter
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
value followed by its textual description; see below for available
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
counters. For brevity, counters that have a value of 0 are not shown in
the statistics file.
The statistics dump ends with the line where the number is identical to
the number in the beginning line; for example:
`` --- Statistics Dump --- (973798949) ``
.. _statistics_counters:
Statistics Counters
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
The following lists summarize the statistics counters that BIND 9 provides.
For each counter, the abbreviated
symbol name is given; these symbols are shown in the statistics
information accessed via an HTTP statistics channel.
The description of the counter is also shown in the
statistics file but, in this document, may be slightly
modified for better readability.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _stats_counters:
Name Server Statistics Counters
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` Requestv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 requests received. Note: this also counts non-query requests.
`` Requestv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 requests received. Note: this also counts non-query requests.
`` ReqEdns0 ``
This indicates the number of requests received with EDNS(0).
`` ReqBadEDN SVer ``
This indicates the number of requests received with an unsupported EDNS version.
`` ReqTSIG ``
This indicates the number of requests received with TSIG.
`` ReqSIG0 ``
This indicates the number of requests received with SIG(0).
`` ReqBadSIG ``
This indicates the number of requests received with an invalid (TSIG or SIG(0)) signature.
`` ReqTCP ``
This indicates the number of TCP requests received.
`` AuthQryRej ``
This indicates the number of rejected authoritative (non-recursive) queries.
`` RecQryRej ``
This indicates the number of rejected recursive queries.
`` XfrRej ``
This indicates the number of rejected zone transfer requests.
`` UpdateRej ``
This indicates the number of rejected dynamic update requests.
`` Response ``
This indicates the number of responses sent.
`` RespTruncated ``
This indicates the number of truncated responses sent.
`` RespEDNS0 ``
This indicates the number of responses sent with EDNS(0).
`` RespTSIG ``
This indicates the number of responses sent with TSIG.
`` RespSIG0 ``
This indicates the number of responses sent with SIG(0).
`` QrySuccess ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in a successful answer, meaning queries which return a NOERROR response with at least one answer RR. This corresponds to the `` success `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryAuthAns ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in an authoritative answer.
`` QryNoauthAns ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in a non-authoritative answer.
`` QryReferral ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in a referral answer. This corresponds to the `` referral `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryNxrrset ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in NOERROR responses with no data. This corresponds to the `` nxrrset `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QrySERVFAIL ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in SERVFAIL.
`` QryFORMERR ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in FORMERR.
`` QryNXDOMAIN ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in NXDOMAIN. This corresponds to the `` nxdomain `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryRecursion ``
This indicates the number of queries that caused the server to perform recursion in order to find the final answer. This corresponds to the `` recursion `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryDuplicate ``
This indicates the number of queries which the server attempted to recurse but for which it discovered an existing query with the same IP address, port, query ID, name, type, and class already being processed. This corresponds to the `` duplicate `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryDropped ``
This indicates the number of recursive queries for which the server discovered an excessive number of existing recursive queries for the same name, type, and class, and which were subsequently dropped. This is the number of dropped queries due to the reason explained with the `` clients-per-query `` and `` max-clients-per-query `` options (see :ref: `clients-per-query <clients-per-query>` ). This corresponds to the `` dropped `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9.
`` QryFailure ``
This indicates the number of query failures. This corresponds to the `` failure `` counter of previous versions of BIND 9. Note: this counter is provided mainly for backward compatibility with previous versions; normally, more fine-grained counters such as `` AuthQryRej `` and `` RecQryRej `` that would also fall into this counter are provided, so this counter is not of much interest in practice.
`` QryNXRedir ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in NXDOMAIN that were redirected.
`` QryNXRedirRLookup ``
This indicates the number of queries that resulted in NXDOMAIN that were redirected and resulted in a successful remote lookup.
`` XfrReqDone ``
This indicates the number of requested and completed zone transfers.
`` UpdateReqFwd ``
This indicates the number of forwarded update requests.
`` UpdateRespFwd ``
This indicates the number of forwarded update responses.
`` UpdateFwdFail ``
This indicates the number of forwarded dynamic updates that failed.
`` UpdateDone ``
This indicates the number of completed dynamic updates.
`` UpdateFail ``
This indicates the number of failed dynamic updates.
`` UpdateBadPrereq ``
This indicates the number of dynamic updates rejected due to a prerequisite failure.
`` RateDropped ``
This indicates the number of responses dropped due to rate limits.
`` RateSlipped ``
This indicates the number of responses truncated by rate limits.
`` RPZRewrites ``
This indicates the number of response policy zone rewrites.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _zone_stats:
Zone Maintenance Statistics Counters
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` NotifyOutv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 notifies sent.
`` NotifyOutv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 notifies sent.
`` NotifyInv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 notifies received.
`` NotifyInv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 notifies received.
`` NotifyRej ``
This indicates the number of incoming notifies rejected.
`` SOAOutv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 SOA queries sent.
`` SOAOutv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 SOA queries sent.
`` AXFRReqv4 ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This indicates the number of requested IPv4 AXFRs.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` AXFRReqv6 ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This indicates the number of requested IPv6 AXFRs.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` IXFRReqv4 ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This indicates the number of requested IPv4 IXFRs.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` IXFRReqv6 ``
2020-07-02 16:54:57 +00:00
This indicates the number of requested IPv6 IXFRs.
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` XfrSuccess ``
This indicates the number of successful zone transfer requests.
`` XfrFail ``
This indicates the number of failed zone transfer requests.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _resolver_stats:
Resolver Statistics Counters
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` Queryv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 queries sent.
`` Queryv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 queries sent.
`` Responsev4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 responses received.
`` Responsev6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 responses received.
`` NXDOMAIN ``
This indicates the number of NXDOMAINs received.
`` SERVFAIL ``
This indicates the number of SERVFAILs received.
`` FORMERR ``
This indicates the number of FORMERRs received.
`` OtherError ``
This indicates the number of other errors received.
`` EDNS0Fail ``
This indicates the number of EDNS(0) query failures.
`` Mismatch ``
This indicates the number of mismatched responses received, meaning the DNS ID, response's source address, and/or the response's source port does not match what was expected. (The port must be 53 or as defined by the `` port `` option.) This may be an indication of a cache poisoning attempt.
`` Truncated ``
This indicates the number of truncated responses received.
`` Lame ``
This indicates the number of lame delegations received.
`` Retry ``
This indicates the number of query retries performed.
`` QueryAbort ``
This indicates the number of queries aborted due to quota control.
`` QuerySockFail ``
This indicates the number of failures in opening query sockets. One common reason for such failures is due to a limitation on file descriptors.
`` QueryTimeout ``
This indicates the number of query timeouts.
`` GlueFetchv4 ``
This indicates the number of IPv4 NS address fetches invoked.
`` GlueFetchv6 ``
This indicates the number of IPv6 NS address fetches invoked.
`` GlueFetchv4Fail ``
This indicates the number of failed IPv4 NS address fetches.
`` GlueFetchv6Fail ``
This indicates the number of failed IPv6 NS address fetches.
`` ValAttempt ``
This indicates the number of attempted DNSSEC validations.
`` ValOk ``
This indicates the number of successful DNSSEC validations.
`` ValNegOk ``
This indicates the number of successful DNSSEC validations on negative information.
`` ValFail ``
This indicates the number of failed DNSSEC validations.
`` QryRTTnn ``
This provides a frequency table on query round-trip times (RTTs). Each `` nn `` specifies the corresponding frequency. In the sequence of `` nn_1 `` , `` nn_2 `` , ..., `` nn_m `` , the value of `` nn_i `` is the number of queries whose RTTs are between `` nn_(i-1) `` (inclusive) and `` nn_i `` (exclusive) milliseconds. For the sake of convenience, we define `` nn_0 `` to be 0. The last entry should be represented as `` nn_m+ `` , which means the number of queries whose RTTs are equal to or greater than `` nn_m `` milliseconds.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
.. _socket_stats:
Socket I/O Statistics Counters
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
Socket I/O statistics counters are defined per socket type, which are
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
`` UDP4 `` (UDP/IPv4), `` UDP6 `` (UDP/IPv6), `` TCP4 `` (TCP/IPv4), `` TCP6 ``
(TCP/IPv6), `` Unix `` (Unix Domain), and `` FDwatch `` (sockets opened
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
outside the socket module). In the following list, `` <TYPE> `` represents
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
a socket type. Not all counters are available for all socket types;
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
exceptions are noted in the descriptions.
`` <TYPE>Open ``
This indicates the number of sockets opened successfully. This counter does not apply to the `` FDwatch `` type.
`` <TYPE>OpenFail ``
This indicates the number of failures to open sockets. This counter does not apply to the `` FDwatch `` type.
`` <TYPE>Close ``
This indicates the number of closed sockets.
`` <TYPE>BindFail ``
This indicates the number of failures to bind sockets.
`` <TYPE>ConnFail ``
This indicates the number of failures to connect sockets.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` <TYPE>Conn ``
This indicates the number of connections established successfully.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` <TYPE>AcceptFail ``
This indicates the number of failures to accept incoming connection requests. This counter does not apply to the `` UDP `` and `` FDwatch `` types.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` <TYPE>Accept ``
This indicates the number of incoming connections successfully accepted. This counter does not apply to the `` UDP `` and `` FDwatch `` types.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` <TYPE>SendErr ``
This indicates the number of errors in socket send operations.
2019-03-31 12:49:47 +02:00
2020-05-14 22:19:00 +00:00
`` <TYPE>RecvErr ``
This indicates the number of errors in socket receive operations, including errors of send operations on a connected UDP socket, notified by an ICMP error message.